Chevrolet Cobalt 2007 Owner Manual

Add to My manuals
444 Pages

advertisement

Chevrolet Cobalt 2007 Owner Manual | Manualzz
2007 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual
M
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 9
Rear Seats ............................................. 16
Safety Belts ............................................ 18
Child Restraints ...................................... 40
Airbag System ........................................ 66
Restraint System Check
......................... 82
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
..........................................
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............
Audio System(s) ...................................
Features and Controls ................................ 85
Keys ....................................................... 87
Doors and Locks .................................... 96
Windows ............................................... 102
Theft-Deterrent Systems
....................... 104
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 108
Mirrors .................................................. 127
OnStar® System ................................... 129
Storage Areas
...................................... 133
Sunroof
................................................ 134
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 221
Your Driving, the Road, and Your
Vehicle .............................................. 222
Towing
................................................. 258
135
138
154
160
177
188
1
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
Headlamp Aiming
.................................
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
....
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
2
271
274
276
282
323
326
333
334
369
378
378
385
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 387
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 388
Customer Assistance Information ............. 409
Customer Assistance and Information ..... 410
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 428
Index .......................................................... 431
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
be have all of them. For example, more than
one entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name COBALT are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears
in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15864457 A First Printing
©
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,” “Do
Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Manual Seats ................................................ 9
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ......................... 10
Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10
Heated Seats .............................................. 11
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12
Head Restraints .......................................... 14
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe) ............................ 15
Rear Seats .................................................... 16
Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 16
Safety Belts .................................................. 18
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 22
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23
Driver Position ............................................. 24
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 33
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 36
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 39
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 39
Child Restraints ............................................ 40
Older Children ............................................. 40
Infants and Young Children ......................... 43
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 47
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 51
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 53
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 59
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position .................................. 62
7
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System .............................................. 66
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 69
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 73
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 73
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................... 74
8
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 75
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 80
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 81
Restraint System Check ............................... 82
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 82
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................... 83
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your
body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
9
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has
this feature, the knob
is located on the front
of the driver seat
lower cushion on the
inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
The driver’s seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward
repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.
To lower the seat, move the lever downward
repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.
10
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have heated front seats. The
switches are located on the instrument panel
above the climate control system.
Press the side of the
switch with the double
indicator lights to turn on
the heated seat at the
highest setting.
Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that the
setting is on high. Press the side of the switch with
the single indicator light to go to the low setting.
The indicator light will be lit to indicate that
the setting is on low. Return the switch to the
center to turn off the heated seat.
If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heated
seat setting will be retained when the vehicle is
started again.
Driver’s Switch Shown,
Passenger’s Switch
Similar
11
Reclining Seatbacks
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks.
The lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seats.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on
the seatback to be sure it is locked.
12
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
13
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
14
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push
the restraint down.
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe)
To use the easy entry seat, do the following:
{CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not
locked, it can move. In a sudden stop or
crash, the person sitting there could be
injured. After you have used it, be sure to
push rearward on an easy entry seat to be
sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
The front passenger seat can be used to easily
get in and out of the rear seat.
1. Push down the easy entry seat handle located
on the rear of the seatback on the outboard
side to release the seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback forward completely while
pushing the seat forward.
3. Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Make
sure the seatback is locked.
4. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place.
15
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
You can fold either side of the rear seatback down
for more cargo space.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
2. Once the handle is pulled, the seatback can
be pushed open through the trunk, or pulled
down from the inside of the vehicle.
1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the
small handles located in the center of the
trunk.
16
To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and push
rearward until you hear a click. Push and pull on
the seatback to be sure it is locked into place.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always pull forward on the
top of the seatback at the area of the
latch to be sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
17
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
18
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 162 and Passenger
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 163.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
19
Put someone on it.
20
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
21
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
22
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 40 or Infants and Young
Children on page 43. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
23
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how
to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
24
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see
Safety Belt Extender on page 39.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to
the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash. See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
on page 31.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
25
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
26
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
27
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the full
width of the belt to spread impact forces. If
a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can
work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
30
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, press
the release button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can
move the height
adjuster up just by
pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pressing
the release button to make sure it has locked
into position.
31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 24.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature which may turn off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, just
let the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
32
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
33
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 39.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
34
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
35
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and for some adults.
When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the
edge of the seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its storage clip.
36
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then,
place the guide over the belt and insert
the two edges of the belt into the slots of
the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
37
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 33. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the
guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward
and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
38
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if
your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in
a side crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate
in a crash, you will need to get new ones,
and probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 83.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
39
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
40
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center
of the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 36. If the child is
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety
belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
41
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
42
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they
need to use a child restraint.
43
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become
so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
44
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Airbags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but not
for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system
can provide.
45
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of
restraints available for children with
special needs.
46
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across
the strongest part of an infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed.
A young child’s hip bones are still so
small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt
may not remain low on the hip bones, as
it should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
47
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
48
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can
also help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
49
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make
sure the child restraint is properly
installed in the vehicle using the vehicle’s
safety belt or LATCH system, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
50
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 53 for more information.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,
and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of
hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps
that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide,
shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following the
instructions that came with that restraint.
51
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system that is designed to turn
off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint. However, no system is fail-safe,
CAUTION:
52
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
and no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
53
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In
the United States, some child restraints also have
a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
54
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has two exposed metal
lower anchors in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the
trim covers on the rear seatback filler panel.
Pull open the trim cover to access the anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 51 for additional information.
55
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
56
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has
been installed. Be sure to follow the
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to
the lower anchors.
57
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim
cover to expose the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
58
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
head restraint.
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route
the tether around the
head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 53.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
59
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
60
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 53.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it
go back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
61
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 51.
In addition, if your vehicle has a passenger airbag
status indicator, your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing
infant seat or a small child in a forward-facing
child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 164 for more information on this including
important safety information.
If your vehicle does not have the passenger sensing
system, the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
will deploy in collisions that are severe enough to
deploy the frontal airbags, even if an infant or a
small child is in the right front passenger’s seat.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
62
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system that is designed to turn
off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint. However, no system is fail-safe,
and no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 9.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 53.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child restraint in
this position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 53 if your child
restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 75. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats
on page 9.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to RUN or START.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 164.
63
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
64
8. If your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system and the airbag is off, the off indicator
on the instrument panel will be lit and stay
lit when the key is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
65
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted side
impact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
are available for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver and for the right
front passenger and the passenger seated
directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the airbag covering on the garnish trim near the
ceiling and the side windows.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
66
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
67
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 40 or Infants and Young Children
on page 43.
68
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 163 for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
69
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver and the person seated directly
behind the driver, it is located in the ceiling
above the side windows.
70
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front passenger and the person
directly behind that passenger, it is located in
the ceiling above the side windows.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. And, if your vehicle
has roof-mounted side impact airbags,
never secure anything to the roof of your
vehicle by routing the rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If
you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle
slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic
frontal sensor which helps the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact
and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less
than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
71
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that does not move or deform, the threshold
level for the reduced deployment is about
12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold
level for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph
(29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole)
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
72
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mounted
side impact airbags. See Airbag System on
page 66. Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A roof-mounted side impact airbag will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts. A roof-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
down. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,
inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front
of the right front passenger. For vehicles with
roof-mounted side impact airbags, there are also
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side windows.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
But the frontal airbags would not help you in
many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only
in moderate to severe side collisions for vehicles
with side impact airbags.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact
the steering wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
73
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
the airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags may still be at least partially inflated
minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or the
garnish trim and ceiling of your vehicle near
the side windows for vehicles with roof–mounted
side impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
74
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and
turn the hazard warning flashers when the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors again, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data Recorders on page 422.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean
that your airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
If your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in
the following illustrations, then your vehicle has
a passenger sensing system for the right front
passenger’s position. A passenger airbag status
indicator on the instrument panel will be visible
when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for
ON and OFF, will be visible on the instrument
panel during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for ON or the symbol
for OFF will be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 164.
75
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
{CAUTION:
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the passenger’s frontal
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. We recommend that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat and an older child
riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system that is designed to turn
off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint. However, no system is fail-safe,
and no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION:
76
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
on the instrument panel will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
on page 62.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
77
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is
lit, it could be because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the
seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
78
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain
in this position for about two minutes. This
will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the passenger’s airbag.
If your vehicle does not have the passenger
sensing system, the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag will deploy in collisions that are severe
enough to deploy the frontal airbags, regardless
of the size of the occupant in the right front
passenger seat.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 163 for
more on this, including important safety
information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your
vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 81 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
79
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase
a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 429.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
80
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors.
If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 410.
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling
and pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbag
modules, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 410.
81
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts
on page 372 for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
82
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
or the roof-mounted side impact airbag
covering (if equipped) on the garnish trim and
ceiling near the side windows, the airbag
may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering
wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or the side impact airbag module,
garnish trim and the ceiling covering for
roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 163.
83
✍ NOTES
84
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys .............................................................. 87
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 88
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ................................................. 89
Doors and Locks .......................................... 96
Door Locks ................................................. 96
Power Door Locks ....................................... 97
Delayed Locking .......................................... 97
Automatic Door Lock ................................... 98
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........ 98
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan) .............. 98
Lockout Protection ....................................... 99
Trunk ........................................................ 100
Windows ...................................................... 102
Manual Windows ....................................... 103
Power Windows ........................................ 103
Sun Visors ................................................ 104
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 104
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 104
PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 106
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 106
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 108
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 108
Ignition Positions ....................................... 108
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 111
Starting the Engine .................................... 111
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 113
Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 115
Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 118
Parking Brake ........................................... 120
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 121
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 123
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 124
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 125
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 126
85
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ......................................................... 127
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 127
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 127
Outside Manual Mirror ............................... 127
Outside Remote Control Mirror .................. 127
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 128
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 128
OnStar® System .......................................... 129
86
Storage Areas ............................................. 133
Glove Box ................................................. 133
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 133
Center Console Storage Area .................... 133
Driver’s Storage Compartment ................... 133
Convenience Net ....................................... 134
Sunroof ....................................................... 134
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
87
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and
all other locks.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer
removes the key tag from the key and gives it to the
first owner. Each tag has a code on it that tells your
dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra
keys. Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose your
key, you will be able to have a new one made easily
using the tag.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer who
can obtain the correct key code. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 416 for more
information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
88
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far
from your vehicle. You may need to stand
closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 89.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors may be locked and
unlocked, and the trunk can be opened from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 197 feet (60 m) away with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. If your vehicle
has the remote vehicle start feature, you can also
start the vehicle’s engine with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Remote Keyless Entry
with Remote Start
Remote Keyless Entry
without Remote Start
89
The following functions may be available if your
vehicle has the RKE system.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has
this feature, the engine may be started from
outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
See “Remote Vehicle Start” later in this section for
more detailed information.
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. The interior lamps will turn off after all of the
doors are closed. If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the remote lock feedback
can be programmed to have the horn chirp
and/or the turn signals flash when the RKE
transmitter is used to lock the vehicle’s doors.
See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 182 for more
information.
90
Pressing the lock button may also arm the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 104.
K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
The interior lamps will turn on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock
feedback can be programmed to have the
horn chirp and/or the turn signals flash when the
RKE transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle’s
doors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 182
for more information.
If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enough
outside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps,
parking lamps, and back-up lamps will turn on
each time the unlock button on the transmitter
is pressed. These exterior lamps will stay on for
20 seconds, or until a door is opened. See
“EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 182 for additional
information.
Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
will disarm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 104.
V (Remote Trunk Release): The trunk will open
when this button on the transmitter is pressed and
held for about one second. You can open the trunk
with the transmitter when the vehicle speed is less
than 2 mph (3 km/h), when the ignition is off, or
when the vehicle shift lever is in PARK (P), if your
vehicle has an automatic transaxle.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): This button
may be used to locate your vehicle. Press and
release this button to initiate vehicle locate. The
horn will sound three times and the headlamps and
turn signals will flash three times. Press and hold
the button for about three seconds to initiate the
panic alarm. The horn will sound and the
headlamps and turn signals will flash for
30 seconds. Press the button again to cancel the
panic alarm.
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to
bring any additional transmitters so they can also
be re-coded to match the new transmitter.
Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,
the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
91
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
The KEY FOB BATT LOW message in the vehicle’s
DIC will display if the RKE transmitter battery is low.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
92
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do
the following:
1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into the
notch located below the vehicle locator/panic
alarm button, and separate the bottom
half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the
new one. Make sure the positive (+) side of
the battery faces up. Use one three-volt,
CR2032, or equivalent, type battery.
3. Snap the front and back together tightly so
moisture will not get inside the transmitter.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine
from outside the vehicle. It may also start the
vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems. When
you start your vehicle using the remote start
feature, the climate control system will come on
and adjust the interior to the temperature settings
that you left it set to when you turned the
vehicle off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may
require a person using remote start to have
the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local
regulations for any requirements on remote starting
of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle
is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate
starts per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of
engine running time.
The remote start feature needs to be reset after
your vehicle’s engine is started two times using the
transmitter’s remote start button. The remote
start system is reset by inserting the vehicle’s key
into the ignition switch and turning to RUN.
See Ignition Positions on page 108 for information
regarding the ignition positions on your vehicle.
You can start your vehicle’s engine from about
197 feet (60 m) away. However, the range may be
less while the vehicle is running, and as a result
you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it
off than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 88 for
additional information.
93
/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remote
start feature, the RKE transmitter will have a
button with this symbol on it.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,
do the following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock
button, then immediately press and hold
the transmitter’s remote start button until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash.
3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps
will turn on and remain on while the engine
is running.
The engine will shut off automatically after
10 minutes, unless a time extension has been
done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into
the ignition switch and turned to RUN.
If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,
and the engine is still running, insert the
key into the ignition switch and turn to RUN to
drive the vehicle.
94
4. To manually shut off a remote start, do any of
the following. The parking lamps will turn off
to indicate the engine is off.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and
press and release the remote start button.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch to RUN and
then LOCK.
Your vehicle’s engine can be started two times,
per ignition cycle, using the transmitter’s remote
start feature. If only one remote start procedure
has been done, since last driving the vehicle,
or resetting the remote start system, the engine
may be started again remotely by following
the remote start procedure a second time.
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the
first 10 minutes will immediately expire and
the second 10 minute time frame will start.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if
any of the follow occur:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 170.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided for that ignition cycle.
Remote Start Ready
(Automatic Transaxle Only)
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start ready
feature. This feature allows your dealer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
If the RKE transmitter has a plus (+) symbol on
the back cover, your vehicle has the remote start
ready feature. You can lock or unlock your
vehicle from about 197 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to
your vehicle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature
are shipped from the factory with the remote
start system enabled. The system may be enabled
or disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE
START” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 182 for additional information.
95
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
CAUTION:
96
(Continued)
There are several ways to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn the
key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
You can also use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped, to lock and unlock
the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on
each door or the power door lock switch to
lock and unlock all doors.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle may have
power door locks. The
locks are located on the
driver’s and front
passenger’s door
armrest.
Driver’s Switch shown,
Front Passenger’s
Switch similar
Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol
to lock the doors. This is the right side for the
driver’s switch and the left side for the front
passenger’s switch.
Press the side of the switch with the unlock
symbol to unlock the doors. This is the left side for
the driver’s switch and the right side for the
front passenger’s switch.
If your vehicle has power locks, it will have the
delayed locking feature.
This feature will delay the actual locking of the
doors for up to five seconds when the power door
lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter
is used to lock the vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle,
three chimes will sound signaling that the delayed
locking feature is active. Five seconds after the
last door is closed, all of the doors will lock and the
turn signal lamps will flash. To cancel the delay
and lock the doors immediately, press the
lock button a second time.
This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in
the ignition.
You can disable this function through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 182.
97
Automatic Door Lock
Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan)
If your vehicle has power door locks, the doors will
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out
of PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle. For a vehicle with a manual transaxle,
the speed must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Your vehicle has rear door security locks.
These prevent passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You
must open the rear
doors to access them.
The label showing
lock and unlock
positions is located near
the lock.
The automatic door locking feature cannot be
disabled.
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
If your vehicle has power locks, it has a
programmable automatic door unlock feature.
The doors can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to automatically unlock
several ways. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 182 for more information.
98
Security Lock Label
shown
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and
turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
power door lock switch, or by lifting the
rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have
this feature. If you press the power door lock
switch when the key is in the ignition and any door
is open, all the doors will lock and the driver’s
door will unlock. Be sure to remove the key from
the ignition when locking your vehicle.
The lockout protection can be overridden by
pressing and holding the power door lock in the
lock position for three seconds.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot
and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.
99
Trunk
To release the trunk lid from the outside, use the
key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, if
equipped.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the trunk lid open or if
CAUTION:
100
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle.
See Climate Control System.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 125.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk
release button located
inside the driver’s
storage compartment
located on the lower left
side of the instrument
panel.
See Instrument Panel Overview on page 138 or
Driver’s Storage Compartment on page 133.
The remote trunk release works when the ignition
is either off or in ACC, or the vehicle speed is
less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk as it
could damage the handle. The emergency
trunk release handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk
release handle located on the inside of the trunk lid
of your vehicle. This handle will glow following
exposure to light. Pull the release handle and push
the trunk lid open from the inside to open the trunk.
101
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
102
Manual Windows
Express-Down Window
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the
window crank to open and close each window.
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature which allows the window to be lowered
fully without continuously pressing the switch. This
switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front of the
switch to the first position, and the driver’s window
will open a small amount. Press the switch
down fully and release. The window goes all the
way down.
Power Windows
If your vehicle has
power windows, the
switches on the driver’s
door armrest control
each of the windows.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the
front of the switch up.
Window Lockout (Sedan)
o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window
Sedan Shown, Coupe
Similar
In addition, each passenger’s door has a window
switch that controls that door’s window. Press
the front of the switch to open the window. Pull the
front of the switch up to close it.
controls also include a lockout switch. Press the
right side of the switch to prevent the rear
passengers from using their window switches. The
driver can still control all the windows with the
lockout on. Press the switch to the left to return to
normal window operation. A red bar on the
right side of the switch indicates that the lockout
feature is off.
103
Sun Visors
Arming the System
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The
visors can also be detached from the center mount
and swung to the side to cover the windows.
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by
pressing the remote keyless entry transmitter
lock button.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The system will arm after either of these
things occur:
• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
• Sixty seconds with any door open.
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity
mirror. Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover
to expose the mirror.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have
a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
104
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a
second time while all the doors are closed,
the system will arm immediately. The system will
still arm in 60 seconds if a door is open. When
the open door is closed, it will also become armed.
The security light, located on the instrument
panel cluster, will turn on to indicate that arming
has been initiated. Once the system is armed, the
security light will flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second,
this means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, you may
lock the car with the manual lock knobs on
the doors.
Disarming the System
You can disarm the system by doing any one of
the following:
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter
unlock button.
• Turn the ignition on.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened
using the trunk release button on the transmitter,
the system will temporarily disarm itself and
re-arm when the trunk has been closed. This
allows you to exit the vehicle, lock the doors using
the transmitter, and open the trunk using the
transmitter without having to disarm and re-arm
the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will
stop flashing.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If the system is armed, it can be activated
by either:
• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This will
cause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed
by a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
• Opening any other door. This will immediately
cause a full alarm of horn and lights for
thirty seconds.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the
following:
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The system will then
re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter. This will also
disarm the system.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.
This will also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If you hear three chirps when you press the
unlock, lock, or trunk release buttons on the
remote keyless transmitter, it means that
the content theft security system alarm was
previously activated.
105
PASS-Key® III+
®
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a
decoder in your vehicle.
106
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not
have to do anything special to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you insert or remove
the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the
vehicle from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of
electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does
not start and the security light comes on, the
key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 379. If the engine still does not start with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an emergency,
contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 416, for more
information.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder
to “learn” the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be
programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer or
a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine
will not start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
the RUN position within five seconds of the
original key being turned to the LOCK position.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes
on and stays on, you may be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+
system, however, is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not
protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system at
this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
107
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Do not exceed 5,000 engine rpm. Avoid
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
108
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) on
page 261 or Towing a Trailer (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 261 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it
to four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and
right while you turn the key hard. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
9 (LOCK): This position locks your steering
column. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
If you have a manual transaxle, the ignition switch
can be turned to LOCK in any shift lever position.
{CAUTION:
If you have a manual transaxle removing
the key from the ignition switch will lock
the steering column and result in a loss of
ability to steer the vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn the
engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key to ACC.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of your electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the
switch. The switch stays in the RUN position when
the engine is running. But even when the ignition
is not running, you can use RUN to operate
your electrical accessories and to display some
warning and indicator lights.
109
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACC or RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition switch will return to RUN for
normal driving.
Column Lock Release
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle, The
following procedure allows the ignition to be turned
to LOCK and for ignition key removal in case of
a dead battery or low voltage battery.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
door while in LOCK or ACC, when the key has
not been removed from the ignition.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
110
2. Using a tool, pry off the cover from the bottom
of the steering column.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which allow’s the radio, power
windows, and sunroof to continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.
Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignition
key is in RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned from
RUN to LOCK, the radio will continue to work
for 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
Also, the power windows and sunroof will
continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until any
door is opened.
3. Place your finger into the access hole and
locate the plunger.
4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’s
door while turning the ignition key to LOCK.
Remove the key.
Starting the Engine
Place the transaxle in the proper gear.
Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer as
soon as possible.
111
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position -- this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in the neutral position
and the parking brake engaged. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all
the way down. That is a safety feature.
112
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as your engine gets warm. Do not race
the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transaxle gently to
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to the START
position, and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the key is
held in START for many seconds, cranking will
be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to
the ACC or LOCK position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transaxle gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, your engine might not
perform properly. Any resulting damage would
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of
the engine coolant heater when the temperature
is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
113
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. For the 2.2L and 2.4L engines, the
electrical cord is located on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle between the strut and
the air cleaner/filter.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
114
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact a
GM dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, the
shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
There are several
different positions for
the automatic transaxle.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle cannot
move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 121. If you are pulling
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Manual
Transaxle) on page 261 or Towing a
Trailer (Automatic Transaxle) on page 261.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system.
115
You have to fully apply your regular brakes first
and then press the shift lever button before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key
is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button
and then move the shift lever into another gear.
See Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 123.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice, or sand without damaging your
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 252.
116
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transaxle. It provides the best fuel
economy for your vehicle. If you need more power
for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 236.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed
without using your brakes for slight downgrades
where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due
to steepness of grade. If constant upshifting or
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this
position can be used to prevent repetitive types of
shifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I)
instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding
roads and when towing a trailer, so that there is less
shifting between gears.
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually
using your brakes. You can use it on very steep
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever
is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into
LOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. If
you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parking
brake to hold the vehicle in place.
117
Manual Transaxle Operation
This is your shift
pattern.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let
up on the accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and
shift to NEUTRAL.
Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift
into FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),
put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on
the clutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal back
down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
118
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the
clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up
on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking
brake, for parking your vehicle.
Up-Shift Light
If you have a manual
transaxle, you may have
an up-shift light. This
light will show you when
to shift to the next
higher gear for the best
fuel economy.
For vehicles with the 2.0L Supercharged engine,
press down the clutch pedal. Then, lift up the
ring on the shift lever below the shift knob and shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal
slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift,
you could lose control of your vehicle.
You could injure yourself or others.
Do not shift down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
United States Only
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions
let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate
slowly and shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go
on and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
119
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the
ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 167.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime
will sound and the PARKING BRAKE message
will appear along with the brake system warning
light when the parking brake is applied and
the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 180.
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
For vehicles equipped with an armrest, lift the
console armrest in order to access the parking
brake lever.
120
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Manual
Transaxle) on page 261 or Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 261.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding
the button on the shift lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the
vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
121
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever
away from PARK (P) without first pushing the
button. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
122
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find
it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To
find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 121.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the
parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, then you will be able to pull
the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift
lock release system. The shift lock release is
designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever
button fully released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P) unless the ignition is in a position
other than LOCK.
The shift lock release is always functional except
in the case of a an uncharged or low voltage
(less than 9 volt) battery.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following
sequence:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press
the shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from
PARK (P), consult your dealer or a professional
towing service.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a
battery with low voltage, try charging or jump
starting the battery. See Jump Starting on
page 317 for more information.
123
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
124
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
125
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 125.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 248.
126
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 121.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer (Manual
Transaxle) on page 261 or Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 261.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
If your vehicle has this mirror, it has a lever
located at the bottom of the mirror. The lever is
used to change the mirror from the day to the night
position. To reduce glare from headlamps
behind you while driving at night, pull the lever
toward you. To return the mirror to the day
position, return the lever to its original position.
There may be two reading lamps located on
the bottom of the mirror. Press the button next to
each lamp to turn it on and off.
Manual Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
If your vehicle has this mirror, it has a lever
located at the bottom of the mirror. The lever is
used to change the mirror from the day to the night
position. To reduce glare from headlamps
behind you while driving at night, pull the lever
toward you. To return the mirror to the day
position, return the lever to its original position.
There may be two reading lamps located on the
bottom of the mirror. Press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on and off.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe
to OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 129 for
more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust your outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle and have a clear view of
objects behind you. The mirror can be folded in to
enter narrow areas.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Adjust the driver’s outside mirror with the control
lever located on the driver’s door. Adjust the outside
mirrors so that the side of the vehicle can be seen
while sitting in a comfortable driving position.
To adjust the passenger’s outside mirror, sit in the
driver’s seat and have a passenger adjust the
mirror for you. The mirror is a manual fold design.
127
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors
are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
Both mirrors can manually be folded by pulling
them toward the vehicle. This feature may
be useful when going through a car wash or a
confined space. Push the mirrors away from the
vehicle, to the normal position, before driving.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
Move the selector switch located below the
four-way control pad to the left or right to choose
either the driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror.
To adjust a mirror, use the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to move the mirror in the
desired direction. The mirror will only move right or
left, up or down. Adjust each outside mirror so that
a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be
seen while sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when
not adjusting either outside mirror.
128
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things
appear farther away than they really are.
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel
your OnStar® service at any time by contacting
OnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®
Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®
Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)
or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®
button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
129
OnStar® Services
®
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar , the Safe
& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®
Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
Connections® Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlock
or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be
available until you register with OnStar®.
Available Services with Safe &
Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
(AACN) (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
130
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used
with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 217 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes
to access location-based weather, local traffic
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone
button and giving a few simple voice commands,
you can browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for more
information.
131
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
132
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Cupholder(s)
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the blue OnStar® button to confirm that your
OnStar® equipment is active.
There are two cupholders located at the front of
the center console, in front of the shift lever. These
cupholders have a black rubber liner that can be
removed for cleaning or to accommodate
larger cup sizes. There are also cupholders for the
rear seat passengers located at the rear of the
center console.
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may have a center console armrest
with storage area. Use the lever on the front of the
console to open it.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever.
Close the glove box with a firm push.
Center Console Storage Area
Driver’s Storage Compartment
The driver’s storage compartment is located near
the left side of the steering column on the
bottom of the instrument panel. Pull the cover
down to open. It can be used to store small items.
133
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You
will see it inside the back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads behind the net. It can help keep
them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
Unclip a corner of the convenience net to fit larger
objects behind the net, then reclip it to secure them
in place. The net is not for larger, heavier loads.
Store them in the trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you are not using it.
Sunroof
If the vehicle has a
sunroof, the switch that
operates it is located
on the headliner
between the map lamps.
134
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is
on, or turned to ACC, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 111.
Press the sunroof switch rearward to open the
sunroof to the vent position. If the sunshade
is closed, it must be opened manually in the vent
position. Press and hold the switch rearward a
second time to open the sunroof. If the sunshade
is closed, it will open automatically when the
sunroof is opened.
To close the sunroof, press the switch forward and
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof
will stop if the switch is released. Close the
sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or
closed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of
the sliding glass panel, damage will occur
and the sunroof may not open or close
properly. Always close the glass panel before
closing the sunshade.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 138
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 140
Other Warning Devices ............................. 140
Horn .......................................................... 140
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 140
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 141
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 142
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 142
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 143
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 143
Windshield Washer .................................... 144
Cruise Control ........................................... 145
Headlamps ................................................ 148
Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 149
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 149
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 149
Fog Lamps ................................................ 150
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 150
Dome Lamp .............................................. 151
Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 151
Mirror Reading Lamps ............................... 151
Electric Power Management ...................... 151
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 152
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 152
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 153
Climate Controls ......................................... 154
Climate Control System ............................. 154
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 157
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 158
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 160
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 161
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 162
Tachometer ............................................... 162
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 162
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 163
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 163
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 164
Charging System Light .............................. 166
Up-Shift Light ............................................ 167
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 167
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 168
Enhanced Traction System Warning
Light ...................................................... 169
135
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light ...................................................... 170
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 170
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 174
Security Light ............................................ 175
Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 175
Highbeam On Light ................................... 175
Fuel Gage ................................................. 175
Boost Gage ............................................... 176
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 177
DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 178
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 180
DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 182
136
Audio System(s) ......................................... 188
Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 189
Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 190
Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 192
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 197
Using an MP3 ........................................... 207
XM Radio Messages ................................. 215
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 217
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 217
Radio Reception ........................................ 218
Care of Your CDs ..................................... 219
Care of the CD Player .............................. 219
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 219
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 219
✍ NOTES
137
Instrument Panel Overview
138
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate Control
System on page 154.
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 157.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 141.
D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped) and Driver
Information Control Buttons. See Cruise
Control on page 145 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 177.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 161
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 217.
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 140.
H. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. See
Windshield Wipers on page 143 and Windshield
Washer on page 144.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 188.
J. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped). See Fog
Lamps on page 150.
K. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 100.
L. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 150.
M. Horn. See Horn on page 140.
N. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s)
and Cigarette Lighter on page 153.
O. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See Manual
Transaxle Operation on page 118 and
Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 115.
P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
on page 154.
Q. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator and Heated
Seats Button (If Equipped). See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 164 and
Heated Seats on page 11.
R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 133.
139
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
140
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering
wheel to the highest level to give your legs more
room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel
is located on the left side of the steering column.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then move
the wheel to a comfortable position, pull up
the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 142.
• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 142.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 143.
• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps on
page 148.
141
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers will not see your turn
signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help
avoid an accident.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a
turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 379.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return
by itself when you release it.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low
beam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.
142
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you until the high-beam headlamps
come on, then release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wipers
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers):
Move the lever to this position for intermittent or
speed sensitive operation. When you select
this position, the delay will vary depending on the
vehicles speed, as well as, the manually
selected delay.
x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with
this symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter or
longer delay between wipes. To the left of the
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from
bottom to top, that indicate the frequency of the
wipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement is
less frequent. Larger bars mean the movement
is more frequent.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the
first setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at
low speed.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the
Use this lever, located on the right side of the
steering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
second setting past intermittent, for wiping at high
speed.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to
this position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there
until the windshield wipers start; then let go.
turn off the windshield wipers.
143
The windshield wipers will stop after one wiping
cycle. If you want additional wiping cycles, hold the
lever down longer.
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from
seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades
do become damaged, get new blades.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it
cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an
overload. If the motor gets stuck, turn the wipers
off, clear away the snow or ice, and then turn
the wipers back on.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on
for more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps
will turn on automatically. They will turn off
15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.
144
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, press the button at the
end of the lever until the washers begin.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
When you release the button, the washers will
stop, but the wipers will continue to wipe for about
three times or will resume the speed you were
using before.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
the left side of the
steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise
control system on and off.
145
RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume a
set speed and to accelerate the speed.
SET– (Set): Press this button to set a speed and
to decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control
on. The indicator light on the button will
come on.
2. Get to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET– part of the control button
and release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED
message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) to show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 230. When road conditions allow, the
cruise control can be used again.
146
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of
course, disengages the cruise control. To return to
the previously set speed, you do not need to go
through the set process again. Once you are going
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can press
the RES+ part of the button briefly.
This will take you back up to your previously
chosen speed and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the
brake pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerate
to a higher speed and reset the cruise control.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+ part of the button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed desired, and then
release the button. To increase the vehicle
speed in very small amounts, press the RES+
part of the button briefly and then release it.
Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the SET– part of the button
until you reach the lower speed you want,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– part of the button briefly. Each time you
do this, the vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
How well the cruise control will work on hills
depends upon the vehicle speed, load and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the vehicle’s speed. When going downhill,
you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep the vehicle’s speed down. Of course, applying
the brake takes turns off the cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal if the vehicle has
a manual transaxle.
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal will
only end the current cruise control session. Press
the cruise control on/off button to turn the
system completely off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
147
Headlamps
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn the
switch to this position to automatically turn on
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) during daytime,
and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps
at night. This position must be selected in
order for the Wiper Activated Headlamps to be
activated. See Wiper Activated Headlamps
on page 149.
P (Off/On): This position is the momentary
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp switch has the following
four positions:
2 (Headlamps): Turn the switch to this position
to turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the switch to this
position to turn on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
148
Off/On switch for the Automatic Headlamp System.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transaxle
must be in the PARK (P) position, before the
Automatic Headlamp System can be turned off.
When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp
System. Rotating the switch to off/on again will turn
the Automatic Headlamp System back on. The
Automatic Headlamp System is always turned on at
the beginning of an ignition cycle.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers are turned
on. For this feature to work, automatic lighting
must be enabled. See Headlamps on page 148 for
additional information.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will
also turn off 15 seconds after the windshield wiper
control is turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off
and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or
the head lamps will be on when not needed.
The DRL system will make the headlamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the
parking lamps only position.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, parking lamps, and instrument
panel lights will not be illuminated unless you
have turned the exterior lamps control to
the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
149
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If equipped, the fog
lamp button is located
on the instrument panel,
to the left of the
steering wheel.
The control for this
feature is located on
the instrument panel
to the left of the
steering wheel.
The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An
indicator light on the cluster will come on when the
fog lamps are on. Push the button again to turn
the fog lamps off.
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and
off when the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
150
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel
lights, when the headlamps are on.
Dome Lamp
Mirror Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have a dome lamp.
Your vehicle may have reading lamps on the
rearview mirror. Push the button to turn the reading
lamps on and off.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn
the lamp off, even when a door is opened.
1 (Door): Move the lever to this position to turn
Electric Power Management
the lamp on whenever a door is opened.
This vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM), an advanced control
system. It estimates the battery’s temperature
and state of charge and then adjusts the voltage for
best performance and extended life of the battery.
+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turn
the dome lamp on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you
open any door. These lamps will fade out after
about 20 seconds after all of the doors have been
closed or when the ignition is turned on. These
lamps will also go on when you press the
trunk release, unlock symbol button or the horn
symbol on the keyless entry system transmitter.
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after your key is removed from the
ignition to provide an illuminated exit.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
151
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver.
152
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed
to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition
is turned off, the battery rundown protection
system will automatically turn the lamp off after
20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone
or CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located in the
center console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in
use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds
the maximum amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer
for additional information on the accessory
power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not use equipment exceeding maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette
lighter. To use the lighter, located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls, push
it in all the way and let go. When it is ready, it
will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of
15 amperes.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the
entire ashtray and empty it.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
153
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the
air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler
air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer
air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets with some air directed to the
windshield and side windows.
The left knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown, without Air
Conditioning similar
Operation
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
154
9 (Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. In any setting other than off, the fan
will run continuously with the ignition on. The fan
must be turned on to run the air conditioning
compressor.
9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all the
way counterclockwise to the off position.
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
h (Recirculate): Press this button to prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or
to help heat or cool the air inside the vehicle
more quickly. An indicator light above the button
will come on in this mode. The air conditioning
compressor also comes on. This mode is
not available for floor, defog and defrost modes.
When the recirculation button is pressed, the
recirculate indicator light will flash five times and
outside air will be delivered. Operation in this mode
during periods of high humidity and cool outside
temperatures may result in increased window
fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode.
Outside Air: This mode allows outside air to
circulate through the vehicle. This mode is
automatically active if recirculate is not selected.
There is no button for outside air.
# (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning, press this button to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light above the button will
come on to let you know the air conditioning
is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It
also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select
Select
Select
Select
the vent mode.
the recirculation mode.
air conditioning.
the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of
time may cause the air inside of the vehicle to
become too dry. To prevent this from happening,
after the air in the vehicle has cooled, turn off the
recirculation by pressing the button again.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned
on when the fan is off.
155
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are
two modes to clear fog or frost from the windshield
and side windows. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly. For
best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
Turn the left knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs about half of the
air to the windshield and the side window
outlets and half to the floor outlets. When you
select this mode the system runs the air
conditioning compressor. To defog the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise
to the warmest setting.
156
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield, with some air directed to the
side window outlets and the floor outlets. When
you select this mode the system runs the air
conditioning compressor. To defrost the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob
clockwise to the warmest setting.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as
much snow from the rear window as possible.
An indicator light above the button will come on to
let you know that the rear window defogger is
activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for about seven
minutes before turning off. If the vehicle is
moving faster than 50 mph (80 kph), the rear
defogger will stay on. The defogger can also be
turned off by pressing the button again or by
turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheels located next to and below
the air outlets to change the direction of the airflow
and to open and close the outlets.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
157
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside air
and recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter. The filter removes certain
particles from the air, including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow, which may
occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that
the filter needs to be replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 391 for replacement
intervals. See your dealer for details on changing
the filter. To find out what type of filter to use,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 404.
To access the passenger compartment air filter
you must go through the glove box.
1. Open the glove box and remove all articles
from the inside.
158
2. Tilt the glove box door down by squeezing on
each side of the glove box until the door can
be lowered from its track. Lower the glove
box door.
3. Open the passenger compartment air filter
door by reaching through the opening in the
back of the glove box and raising the tab until
the door can be opened downward.
4. Remove the filter by sliding it out of the
housing.
When installing a new air filter make sure the
AIR FLOW arrow is pointing downward. Reverse
Steps 1 through 5 making sure the glove box
door snaps back into place.
159
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
160
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You
will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will
need to drive safely and economically.
United States SS Cluster shown, Canada and Base similar
161
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will sound for several seconds to remind
you and your passengers to buckle your
safety belts. The driver safety belt light will also
come on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 178.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply open the driver’s door
and the mileage will be displayed briefly.
You should buckle your
seat belt.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer
installed, the new one will be set to the correct
mileage total of the old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
162
If the vehicle is equipped with the passenger
sensing system, this chime and light will be
repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come
on. See Passenger Sensing System on page 75
for more information.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
If equipped, several seconds after the key is
turned to RUN or START, a chime will sound for
several seconds to remind the front passenger
to buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if
the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 75 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light will also come
on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag
symbol. The system checks the airbag’s
electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells
you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the airbag sensor, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information
on the airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 66.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
163
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
then your instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 75.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
164
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 75 for more on this,
including important safety information.
165
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 163.
166
Charging System Light
The charging system
light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, and the engine
is not running, as a
check to show you it is
working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving
while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
Up-Shift Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle may have an up-shift light. When this
light comes on, you should shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions
allow you to.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
This light is located in
your instrument panel
cluster to the left of
the tachometer.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
United States Only
See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 118 for
more information.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
167
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking
brake is fully released. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is
still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See
Towing Your Vehicle on page 258.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
168
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Your vehicle may have
an Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
warning light.
The ABS warning light will come on briefly when
you turn the ignition key to RUN. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light is not on, you still have brakes,
but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular
brake system warning light is also on, you do not
have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with
your regular brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 167.
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
If your vehicle is
equipped with the
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS),
this warning light should
come on briefly as
you start the engine.
If the warning light does not come on, then have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when
you are driving, there may be a problem with your
Enhanced Traction System and your vehicle
may need service. When this warning light is on,
the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may
come on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift
lever to LOW (L), the warning light will come on
and stay on. To turn the system back on, move
the shift lever back to a position other than
LOW (L). The warning light should go off. See
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 230
for more information.
• The warning light will come on when you set
your parking brake with the engine running, and
it will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If the transaxle shift lever is in any
position other than LOW (L) and the warning
light stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means there is a problem with
the system.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off
and the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light
comes on and stays on for an extended period of
time when the transaxle shift lever is in any
position other than LOW (L), your vehicle
needs service.
169
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on when
the engine has
overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 303 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on could cause your
vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 303. Your vehicle could be damaged,
and it might not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on when starting your
vehicle. If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
170
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 274.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
171
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
172
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 280.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 277. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
173
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem,
this light will stay on after
you start your engine,
or come on when you
are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving
enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
The oil light could also come on in three other
situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show
you it is working, but the light will go out when
you turn the ignition to START. If it does not
come on with the ignition on, you may have a
problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed
right away.
174
blink on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on
for a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information
regarding this light, see
Theft-Deterrent
Systems on page 104.
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 142.
Fog Lamp Light
If equipped, the fog
lamps light will come on
when the fog lamps
are in use.
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel
you have left.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are
turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 150 for more
information.
175
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you
turn off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 385.
176
Boost Gage
United States
Canada
If equipped, this gage is located near the driver’s
side of the instrument panel cluster.
This gage indicates vacuum during light to
moderate throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
This gage displays the air pressure level in the
intake manifold before it enters the engine’s
combustion chamber.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
This gage is automatically centered at zero every
time the ignition is turned to RUN. Actual vacuum or
boost is displayed from this zero point. Changes in
ambient pressure, such as driving in mountains
and changing weather, will slightly change the
zero reading.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC). The DIC display gives you the status of
many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also
used to display driver personalization menu modes
and warning/status messages. All messages will
appear in the DIC display, located at the bottom of
the instrument panel cluster.
q (Information): Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some
vehicle information mode displays, select a
personalization menu mode setting, or
acknowledge a warning message.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons
at the same time for one second, then release
the buttons to enter the personalization menu.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 182 for
more information.
177
DIC Operation and Displays
TRIP A or TRIP B
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The
DIC has different modes which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons. The button functions
are detailed in the following.
Press the information button until TRIP A or
TRIP B is displayed. These modes show the
current distance traveled since the last reset for
each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time.
Information Modes
q (Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside
air temperature and the odometer are displayed.
This mode shows the temperature outside of
the vehicle in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C) and the total distance
the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). The outside air temperature
will appear on the left side of the DIC display and
the odometer will appear on the right side of
the display.
To change the DIC display to English or metric
units, see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 182.
178
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing and holding the reset button for a
few seconds while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE is
displayed. This mode shows the remaining
distance you can drive without refueling in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based on
fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW
will display.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel
range is an average of recent driving conditions.
As your driving conditions change, this data is
gradually updated. The FUEL RANGE mode
cannot be reset.
ECON (Economy)
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until ECON is
displayed. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based on
current and past driving conditions.
Press the information button until OIL LIFE is
displayed. The engine oil life system shows
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will
show 100% when the system is reset after an
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Press and hold the reset button while ECON is
displayed to reset the average fuel economy.
Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel
economy is not reset, it will be continually updated
each time you drive.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED is
displayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s average
speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h).
Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED
is displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Engine Oil on page 287 and
Scheduled Maintenance on page 391.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System” under Engine Oil Life System on
page 292.
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT is
displayed. This mode shows the temperature of the
engine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
179
DIC Warnings and Messages
BRAKE FLUID
These messages appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
This message displays to inform the driver that the
brake fluid level is low while the ignition is on.
The brake system warning light on the instrument
panel cluster also comes on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 167 for more information.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer
as soon as possible.
A message will clear when the vehicle’s condition
is no longer present. To acknowledge a message
and clear it from the display, press and hold
any of the DIC buttons. If the condition is still
present, the warning message will come back on
the next time the vehicle is turned off and back
on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds
when the message displays. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
180
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine
oil has expired and it should be changed.
When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you
still must reset the engine oil life system
separately. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 292 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 391 for more information.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not
been fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make
sure that it is on properly. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn
the message off.
COOLING MODE ON
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message may display on some vehicles.
Under severe conditions, hot ambient
temperatures, steep grades, and towing, your
vehicle may experience more transaxle shifting.
This is temporary and normal under these
conditions. This does not require engine or
transaxle service.
This message displays when the cruise control
system is active. See Cruise Control on page 145
for more information.
This message displays to inform you that the
vehicle has reduced engine power to avoid
damaging the engine. Reduced engine power can
affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this
message is on, but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
DOOR AJAR
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays if one or more of the
vehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When this
message displays, make sure that the door(s)
are closed completely.
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
CRUISE ENGAGED
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace
the battery in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 89.
181
LOW COOLANT
POWER STEERING
If your vehicle has a 2.0L engine, this message
displays when there is a low level of engine
coolant. Have the cooling system serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible. See Engine Coolant
on page 296 for more information.
This message displays if a problem has been
detected with the electric power steering. Have
your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
See Fuel Gage on page 175, Fuel on page 276,
and Filling the Tank on page 280 for more
information.
LOW TRACTION
This message displays when the Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) is actively limiting wheel
spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if this
message displays, so adjust your driving
accordingly. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 230 for more information.
PARKING BRAKE
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 120 for
more information.
182
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem
with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk lid is not
closed completely. Make sure that the trunk
lid is closed completely. See Trunk on page 100.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to a
preferred setting. All of the features listed may not
be available on your vehicle. Only the features
available will be displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the features were set
when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since
that time.
To change feature settings, use the following
procedure:
Personalization Menu Modes
Entering Personalization Menu
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the
engine oil life system. To reset the system,
see Engine Oil Life System on page 292. See
“OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 178 for more information.
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is
stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and
reset buttons at the same time for
one second, then release to enter the
personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph
(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will be
accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through
the available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through
the available settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within
ten seconds, the display will go back to the
previous information displayed.
OIL LIFE RESET
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the
vehicle information. When UNITS appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default in United States): All
information will be displayed in English units. For
example, distance will be shown in miles (mi)
and fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg).
METRIC (default in Canada): All information
will be displayed in metric units. For example,
distance will be shown in kilometers (km) and fuel
economy in liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
183
LOCK HORN
UNLOCK HORN
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to
chirp every time the lock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to
chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The horn will still chirp on the second press.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the
unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 89 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
184
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 89 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the
lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on the
RKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at
least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When
DELAY LOCK appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release
buttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal
lighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk
release buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You can
temporarily override delayed locking by pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter a
second time.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when
pressing the power lock switch or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 89 for more information.
See Power Door Locks on page 97, Delayed
Locking on page 97, and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 89 for
more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
185
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to
automatically unlock certain doors, can be enabled
or disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will
automatically unlock.
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle and DRIVER or ALL is
selected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature
determines when the automatic door unlocking
will occur. When UNLK appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically
unlock.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key
is turned off.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If you have a manual transaxle vehicle, the
door(s) will automatically unlock when the
ignition is turned off.
If you have an automatic transaxle vehicle, you can
select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See
“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)”
following.
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on
page 98 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on
page 98 for more information.
186
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS
appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in
which the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE
appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will
turn on when the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 89 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display all
information in English.
FRENCH: The DIC will display all information
in French.
SPANISH: The DIC will display all information
in Spanish.
GERMAN: The DIC will display all information
in German.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and exit out
of the personalization menu mode.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any
of the following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list
is reached.
187
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 222. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far
greater access to audio stations and
song listings. Giving extended attention
to entertainment tasks while driving can
cause a crash and you or others can
be injured or killed. Always keep your
eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended
searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 222.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
188
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
radio, make sure that it can be added by
checking with your dealer. Also, check federal
rules covering mobile radio and telephone
units. If sound equipment can be added, it is
very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition is
turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 111 for more information.
Setting the Time
(Without Date Display)
If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with a
single CD player and preset buttons numbered
one through six, the radio will have a clock button
for setting the time. You can set the time by
following these steps:
1. Press the clock button until the hour numbers
begin flashing on the display. Press the clock
button a second time and the minute
numbers will begin flashing on the display.
2. While either the hour or the minute numbers
are flashing, turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the time.
3. Press the clock button again until the clock
display stops flashing to set the currently
displayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stop
after five seconds and the current time
displayed will be automatically set.
189
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow label.
Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,
press the pushbutton located under the desired
option to select the default. Press the clock button
again to apply the selected default, or let the
screen time out.
Setting the Time (With Date Display)
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD
player, the radio has a clock button for setting the
time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
year) displays.
190
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels that you want to change. Every
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
or the date if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the
tune knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
The date does not automatically display. The only
way to see the date is by pressing the clock
button when the radio is on. The date with display
times out after a few seconds and goes back to
the normal radio and time display.
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD
player, the radio has a MENU button instead of
the clock button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option is displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels that you want to change. Every
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
or the date if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the
tune knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow
label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
3. Press the clock or MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
The date does not automatically display. The only
way to see the date is by pressing the MENU
button and then the clock button when the radio is
on. The date with display times out after a few
seconds and goes back to the normal radio
and time display.
191
Radio with CD (Base)
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time.
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
The radio goes to the previous volume setting
whenever the radio is turned on. The volume can
still be adjusted by using the volume knob.
192
Setting Preset Stations
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep
sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass
or treble, press the tune knob or the
BASS/TREBLE pushbutton until the desired tone
control label displays. Turn the tune knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the setting. The current bass or treble
level displays. If a station’s frequency is weak, or
has static, decrease the treble.
balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob
until the desired speaker control label displays.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the setting.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
Loc (Locked): This message is displayed while
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to adjust
BASS and TREBLE Settings.
193
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R has been handled. There can be an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,
and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these
problems occur, check the bottom surface of the
CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 219 for more information.
194
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
the CD. If the CD is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than ten
seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held
or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
pushbutton to advance playback quickly. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, you
can listen to CD tracks in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random, do the following:
1. Press this button to play tracks from the
CD you are listening to in random order.
The random icon displays.
2. Press this button again to turn off random play.
The random icon disappears from the display.
RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track
can be repeated.
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. An arrow symbol
displays. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch
the display between the track number, elapsed
time of the track, and the time. When the ignition is
off, press this button to display the time.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and track number displays while a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device such as a portable audio player.
195
CD Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD-R.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer,
MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape player,
etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer while reporting
the problem.
196
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 222 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, press the
radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio
from the device over the car speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
Radio with CD (MP3)
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
make additional volume adjustments from the
portable device.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux” displays.
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD
(MP3) similar
197
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information. This
system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
appears on the display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™
offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channels
including music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather
(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text
information that includes song title and artist name.
A service fee is required in order to receive the
XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;
In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR
(438-9677).
198
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as your
speed changes while driving. That way, the volume
level should sound about the same as you
drive. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med
(medium), or High) to select the level of radio
volume compensation. The display times out
after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher
setting allows for more radio volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow
to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes on to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or
MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) can display. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label, or
press the pushbutton positioned under any one
of the labels and the information about that
label displays.
While information is not available, No Info displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this
feature. See Defensive Driving on page 222.
199
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released, the station that was
set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
200
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or
Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,
press the tune knob until the tone control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can be adjusted by
pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward) or
REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or
has static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select
preset equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the
EQ button until Manual displays or start to
manually adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by
pressing the tune knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control
labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the
desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
under the desired label. Turn the tune knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can be
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, or
REV button until the desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.
201
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button
to display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with that
category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
202
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category displays or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
The radio does not let you to remove or add
categories while the vehicle is moving faster than
5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 215 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into
the slot, label side up. The player pulls
the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds. You will hear a beep and
Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to
six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
203
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 219 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
204
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player and
begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to
go to the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right
SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the track. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, you
can listen to the tracks in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in
a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of
the CD player. A RDM label displays.
To play the tracks from the single CD in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the LOAD button.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
Insert one or more discs partway into the
slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press
the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
205
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the
MP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of
playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For
more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 207
later in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer while reporting the
problem.
206
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 222 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, press the
radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio
from the device over the vehicle’s speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
make additional volume adjustments from the
portable device.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues to play, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins to
play audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Song title, artist name, and album can display
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
207
Compressed Audio
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3
files. By default the radio reads only the
uncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.
Pressing the CAT (category) button toggles
between compressed and uncompressed
audio format.
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying
to locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions may not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or
a combination of a large number of files
and folders, or playlists can cause the player
to be unable to play up to the maximum
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play a large number of files,
folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more space on
the display, and might not fully display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc
can cause the disc not to function in
the player.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
208
Change playlists by using the previous and next
folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no file
folders can also be played. If a CD-R contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
and 255 files, the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are not accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All
files contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
No Folder
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions are not displayed
on a CD-R that was recorded without folders
or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD-R contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first
and then goes to the root folder. When the
radio displays the name of the folder, the radio
displays ROOT.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
209
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks recorded to the CD-R are played in the
following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default
display. The new track name displays.
210
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software, can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD
Player), or press the load button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R
should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in
the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size
CD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the
same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty
in loading and ejecting. If these problems
occur, check the bottom surface of the CD.
If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see
Care of Your CDs on page 219 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
211
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep will
sound and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R automatically pulls
back into the player and begins playing. For the
Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on
the CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either
SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward
through MP3 files on the CD.
212
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an MP3
file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD-R or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
1. To play MP3 files in random order from the
CD-R that is currently playing, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It can take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number of MP3 files
recorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playing
while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R begins
playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist.
The current artist playing is shown on the second
line of the display between the arrows. Once all
songs by that artist are played, the player moves to
the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R
and begins playing MP3 files by that artist. If you
want to listen to MP3 files by another artist, press
the pushbutton located below either arrow button.
The CD goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist displays.
213
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. The album name
displays on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album and begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 files
from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3
playback.
214
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays while a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
215
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Theft Locked
Theftlock® active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
displays after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available
XM™ Not Available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
216
Theft-Deterrent Feature
They include the following:
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and
LOCK or LOCKED will appear on the display.
x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous stored radio station and
stay there. Press and hold the up or down arrow
longer than three-quarters of a second to advance
to the next or previous station with a strong
signal in the selected band.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will
not operate if stolen.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or previous track. Press
and hold the up or down arrow longer than
three-quarters of a second to continue advancing
ahead or reversing back, to other tracks within
the disc.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Radio controls are
located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has
this feature, some audio
controls can be
adjusted at this location.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to
silence the system. Press this button again to
turn the sound on. If your vehicle is equipped with
OnStar®, press and hold this button for two
seconds to activate voice on the OnStar system.
See the OnStar® System on page 129 in this
manual for more information.
217
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet.
If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations boosts the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels during the night.
Static can also occur when things like storms
and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
218
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can cause
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.
The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to
indicate interference.
Care of Your CDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is
still tightened to the fender. If tightening is
required, tighten by hand, then with a wrench
one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System
Your vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio
antenna that is located on the trunk of your
vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice
build up for clear radio reception.
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
219
✍ NOTES
220
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle ............................................ 222
Defensive Driving ...................................... 222
Drunken Driving ........................................ 223
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 226
Braking ...................................................... 226
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 227
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 229
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 230
Limited-Slip Differential .............................. 231
Steering .................................................... 231
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 234
Passing ..................................................... 234
Loss of Control .......................................... 236
Racing or Other Competitive Driving .......... 237
Driving at Night ......................................... 238
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 239
City Driving ............................................... 242
Freeway Driving ........................................ 243
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 244
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 245
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 246
Winter Driving ........................................... 248
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .......................................... 252
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 253
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 253
Towing ........................................................ 258
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 258
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 259
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) ......... 261
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transaxle) ...... 261
221
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 18.
222
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll,
claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
223
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her
same body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
224
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
225
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes,
the steering, and the accelerator. All three
systems have to do their work at the places where
the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 230.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 274.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 167.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
226
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 274.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to
drive away, your ABS will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise
while this test is going on, and you may even
notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a
little. This is normal.
227
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
wheel.
228
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation
or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a
situation that requires hard braking.
Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was
headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That
could be off the road, into the very thing you were
trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily
increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to
squeeze the brakes hard without locking the
wheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease
off the brake pedal. This will help you retain
steering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.
See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 227.
In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have ABS, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your
wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to your steering.
229
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is
especially useful in slippery road conditions.
The system operates only if it senses that one
or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also
upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin. You may
feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
A LOW TRACTION message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction
control system is actively limiting wheel spin.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
Enhanced Traction System begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to
safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise
control. See Cruise Control on page 145.
230
When the system is on,
this warning light will
come on to let you know
there’s a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when
you’re driving, there may be a problem with
your Enhanced Traction System and your vehicle
may need service. When this warning light is
on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may
come on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift
lever to LOW (L), the warning light will come
on and stay on. To turn the system back
on, move the shift lever back to a position
other than LOW (L). The warning light should
go off.
• The warning light will come on when you set
your parking brake with the engine running,
and it will stay on if your parking brake
does not release fully. If the transaxle shift
lever is in any position other than LOW (L) and
the warning light stays on after your parking
brake is fully released, it means there is
a problem with the system.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine related problem, the system will turn
off and the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light
comes on and stays on for an extended period of
time when the transaxle shift lever is in any position
other than LOW (L), your vehicle needs service.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 274 for more information.
Limited-Slip Differential
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip
transaxle can give you additional traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard
transaxle most of the time, but when one of the front
wheels loses traction, this feature will allow the
wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the
power steering assist system will continue
to operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.
If you lose power steering assist because the
electric power steering system is not functioning,
you can steer, but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction
several times until it stops, or hold the steering
wheel in the stopped position for an extended
amount of time, you may notice a reduced amount
of power steering assist. The normal amount of
power steering assist should return shortly after a
few normal steering movements.
231
The electric power steering system does not
require regular maintenance. If you suspect
steering system problems and/or the POWER
STEERING message comes on, contact
your dealer for service repairs. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 180.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle at which the curve is banked, and
your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
232
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
braking can demand too much of those places.
You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering
through a sharp curve and you suddenly
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering
and acceleration — can overwhelm those places
where the tires meet the road and make you lose
control. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 230.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle
the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 274.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come over
a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts
out from between parked cars and stops right in
front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes
you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes — but, unless
you have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock
your wheels.
See Braking on page 226. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
233
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the worst
of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
234
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and do not get too close. Time your move
so you will be increasing speed as the time
comes to move into the other lane. If the way
is clear to pass, you will have a running
start that more than makes up for the distance
you would lose by dropping back.
And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow
down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change
signal before moving out of the right lane to
pass. When you are far enough ahead of
the passed vehicle to see its front in
your vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right
lane change signal and move back into
the right lane. Remember that your vehicle’s
passenger side outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
235
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a
time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before
passing the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
236
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),
remember: It helps to avoid only the acceleration
skid. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 230. If you do not have the Enhanced
Traction System, or if the system is off, then
an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking
skid. If you do not have ABS, then in a braking
skid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,
release enough pressure on the brakes to get the
wheels rolling again. This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when
you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
Racing or Other Competitive
Driving
See your warranty book before using your
vehicle for racing or other competitive driving.
After reviewing your warranty book, please see the
GM Performance Parts website or catalog and
contact the race sanctioning bodies, for example
Sports Car Club of America (SCCA) or Grand
American, for parts and equipment required
for racing or other competitive driving.
237
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
238
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction.
239
It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if
your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a
heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the
road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
240
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They may
not work as well in a quick stop and may
cause pulling to one side. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow
down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through your engine’s air intake and
badly damage your engine. Never drive through
water that is slightly lower than the underbody
of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep
puddles or standing water, drive through them
very slowly.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warning
signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
241
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
City Driving
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 334.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
242
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 243.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
243
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at
the same speed most of the other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway
as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many
miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable
clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out.
244
Of course, you will find experienced and able
service experts in GM dealerships all across North
America. They will be ready and willing to help if
you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
with a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
245
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
246
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
247
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 334.
248
If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),
keep the transaxle shift lever in DRIVE (D) so
the system will be able to improve your ability to
accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has this system, you will
want to slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you
may want to turn the traction system off, such
as when driving through deep snow and loose
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at
lower speeds. See Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) on page 230.
If your vehicle does not have ETS, accelerate
gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin
and polish the surface under the tires even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Unless your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), you will want to brake very gently,
too. If your vehicle does have ABS, see
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 227.
This system improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
249
Whether your vehicle has ABS or not, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feel your
vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little.
Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the
most traction you can.
Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if you
brake so hard that the wheels stop rolling, you will
just slide. Brake so the wheels always keep
rolling and you can still steer.
• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allow
greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may
appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot
reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind
buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the
surface of a curve or an overpass may remain
icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you
see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before
you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
250
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might
not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run the engine only as long as you must.
This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
251
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. And, the transaxle or
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.
That could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out on page 253.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 353.
252
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)
and a forward gear, or with a manual transaxle,
between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and
REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little as
possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you
shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out
after a few tries, it may need to be towed out.
If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 258.
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
253
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires
on page 334 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 342.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label either attached above the door lock post
for a two door vehicle or below the door lock post
for a four door vehicle. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
254
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer (Manual Transaxle) on page 261 or
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 261 for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
255
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
256
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door, tells you
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it can
change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
257
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
258
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 416.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as
behind a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment,
many vehicles can be towed in these ways.
See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,”
following.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you will want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving
on a Long Trip on page 244.
259
Dinghy Towing
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front
following these steps:
To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following fuse
from the floor console fuse block: 8 (Ignition
Switch, PASS-Key® III+). See Floor Console Fuse
Block on page 380 for more information.
Remember to reinstall the fuse once you have
reached your destination.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing
your vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock the
steering wheel.
3. Shift an automatic transaxle to NEUTRAL (N)
or a manual transaxle to NEUTRAL.
4. Release the parking brake.
260
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear
could damage it. Also, repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Never have your
vehicle towed from the rear.
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be
dinghy towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this
section.
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may
cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always tow your vehicle using
the dinghy towing procedure listed in this
section or put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped
with a manual transaxle. If you have the
Cobalt SS, you can tow a trailer. See “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index for more information.
Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask
your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. If your vehicle
is not equipped as stated above, do not tow a
trailer.
261
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of the
Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering
is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to
be used properly.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate
at relatively higher speeds and under greater
loads, generating extra heat. Also, the trailer adds
considerably to wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
262
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you will be driving.
A good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle
is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps your engine and other parts
of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a
trailer. Do not drive faster than the maximum
posted speed for trailers, or no more than
55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your
vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow when the outside air temperature
is above 100°F (38°C).
• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs
(450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used
to pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your
vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7
263
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers,
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 253 for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
264
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You will find these
numbers on the Tire-Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253. Then be
sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety
chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the
bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you will need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not
intended for hitches. Do not attach rental
hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that does not
attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body
of your vehicle when you install a trailer
hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes
later when you remove the hitch. If you do
not seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 125. Dirt
and water can also enter the vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you will be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly. Do not try to tap into your
vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems will not work well, or at all.
265
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working.
This lets you check your electrical connection at
the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
266
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead
when you are towing a trailer. And, because
the vehicle is a good deal longer, you will need to
go much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will
not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.
Check with your dealer. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a
turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you
are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It is important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous
grades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,
higher than normal engine and transaxle
temperatures may result and damage your
vehicle. Frequent stops are very important to
allow the engine and transaxle to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
do not shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and
no longer work well.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the
indicator is in the red area, turn off the air
conditioning to reduce engine load. See Engine
Overheating on page 303.
267
When towing under severe conditions such as hot
ambient temperatures or steep grades, your
vehicle may experience more transaxle shifting.
A COOLING MODE ON message may also appear
in the DIC. This alerts the driver that the shifting
mode is in progress and is aiding engine cooling.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 180
for more information.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
268
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here is how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or into
gear for a manual transaxle. When parking
uphill, turn your wheels away from the
curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P) for
an automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for a
manual transaxle.
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you are pulling a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 391 for more on this.
Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are transaxle fluid (do not overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake
system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you
are trailering, it is a good idea to review this
information before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat
during severe operating conditions. See Engine
Overheating on page 303.
269
✍ NOTES
270
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 274
Accessories and Modifications ................... 274
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 275
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 275
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .......................................... 276
Fuel ............................................................. 276
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 277
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 277
California Fuel ........................................... 278
Additives ................................................... 278
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 279
Filling the Tank ......................................... 280
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 282
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 282
Hood Release ........................................... 283
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 284
Engine Oil ................................................. 287
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 292
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 294
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 295
Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 295
Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 296
Engine Coolant .......................................... 296
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 303
Engine Overheating ................................... 303
Cooling System ......................................... 305
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 312
Brakes ...................................................... 313
Battery ...................................................... 316
Jump Starting ............................................ 317
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 323
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 326
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 326
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 327
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) ................................................ 328
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps
(Coupe) ................................................. 329
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps (Sedan) ......................... 330
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe) ........................... 331
License Plate Lamp ................................... 332
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 332
271
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 333
Tires ............................................................ 334
Winter Tires .............................................. 335
Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................ 336
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 339
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 342
High-Speed Operation ............................... 344
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 345
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 346
Buying New Tires ...................................... 347
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 349
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 350
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 351
Wheel Replacement .................................. 351
Tire Chains ............................................... 353
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 354
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 355
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 356
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ............................................. 360
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 365
Compact Spare Tire .................................. 368
272
Appearance Care ........................................ 369
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 369
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 370
Leather ...................................................... 371
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................ 371
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 372
Weatherstrips ............................................ 372
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 372
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 373
Finish Care ............................................... 373
Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 374
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 374
Tires ......................................................... 375
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 375
Finish Damage .......................................... 376
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 376
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 376
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 377
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification .................................. 378
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 378
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 378
Electrical System ........................................ 378
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 378
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 379
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 379
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................. 379
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 379
Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 380
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 382
Capacities and Specifications .................... 385
273
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these accessories may
even cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle
all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these
marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
274
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,
many parts and systems (including some inside
the vehicle), many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 429.
275
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 80.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 406.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
276
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep your engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that
identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at the
top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on page 378.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN
Code F), use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane
rating is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
If your vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B)
or the 2.0L Supercharged engine (VIN Code P), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced,
and you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock.
If the octane is less than 87, you may notice a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon
as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 278 for additional information.
277
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 170. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your GM dealer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
278
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines
may be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts
in your fuel system and also damage the plastic
and rubber parts. That damage would not be
covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
Motors recommends against the use of such
gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark
plugs and the performance of the emission control
system may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
279
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
280
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 372.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 170.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the
fuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 180 for more
information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 170.
281
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
282
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with
this symbol on
it. It is located under
the instrument
panel on the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push
the secondary hood release lever to the left. It
is located under the front center of the
hood toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gas
strut will automatically take over to lift and
hold the hood in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler
caps are on properly. Lower the hood until the
lifting force of the strut is reduced, then
release the hood to latch fully. Check to make
sure the hood is closed and repeat the
process if necessary.
283
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine (2.4L L4 engine similar), here is what you will see:
284
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 294.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 287.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 287.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 313 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 296.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 382.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 317.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 317.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling
System on page 305.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 312.
285
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine, here is what you will see:
286
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 312.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 287.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 287.
D. Intercooler System Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 296.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 313 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 296.
F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 382.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 317.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 317.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling
System on page 305.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 294.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 284
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil
several minutes to drain back into the
oil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
287
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, you
will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 385.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 284
for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the upper mark that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range. Push
the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
288
2.2L L4 Engine and 2.4L
L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Supercharged
Engine
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For Vehicles With the 2.2L or
2.4L L4 Engine
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
289
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are
identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and
have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil
container.
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4
Supercharged Engine Only
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
290
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M, such
as Mobil 1® or equivalent. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this
GM standard. You should look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M.
You should look for this on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M may not be available. You can add
substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 with the
starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substitute oil
not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be
used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
standards are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
291
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 180. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must
be reset.
292
Your dealer has GM-trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check
your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you
must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be
reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons
on the DIC at the same time to enter the
personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 182.
3. Press the information button to scroll through
the available personalization menu modes
until the DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will
tell you the system has been reset.
5. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the reset
procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that
may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a
local recycling center for help.
293
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 284
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 391 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screws
that hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be
sure to reinstall the cover tightly.
2.2L and 2.4L L4 Engines
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required. Never use
compressed air to clean the filter.
There is a special procedure for inspecting and
replacing the filter. Because this procedure
is difficult, you should have it done at your dealer
service department. Contact your dealer for
additional information, or the procedure can be
found in the service manual. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 429.
294
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid
level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to
the dealership service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 394, and
be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 402.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 402.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer
and have it repaired as soon as possible. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 402
for the proper fluid to use.
295
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
See Brakes on page 313 for more information.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 303.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to
−34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
296
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at the
first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 402 for more information.
297
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD FILL line.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 284
for more information on location.
298
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surge
tank, but only when the engine is cool. If the
coolant surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating
on page 303 for instructions on “How to Add
Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
299
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine Only)
{CAUTION:
Turning the fill neck pressure cap when
the engine and intercooler are hot can
allow steam and scalding liquids to blow
out and burn you badly. Never turn the fill
neck pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and intercooler are hot.
The intercooler system fill neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment, near the center of
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 284 for more information on location.
300
Park your vehicle on a level surface and turn off
the engine. When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be visible within the horizontal
tube section of the fill neck. When the engine is
warm, the coolant level could be as high as
the FULL HOT line on the fill neck, or a little
higher.
Adding Coolant to the Intercooler System
Fill Neck
If coolant is not visible in the fill neck, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the fill neck, but be sure that the
cooling system, including the fill neck pressure
cap, is cool before you do so.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the intercooler system pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
intercooler system, including the
intercooler system pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the intercooler system and
intercooler system pressure cap to cool if
you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your
intercooler system can be dangerous.
Plain water, or some other liquid such as
alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot.
Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, intercooler, and other
parts. Use the recommended coolant and the
proper coolant mixture.
301
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the fill neck pressure cap
when the intercooler system, including the
upper intercooler hose, is no longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss,
wait for that to stop. This will allow any
remaining pressure to be vented.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the fill neck, until there is coolant visible in
the horizontal tube section of the fill neck.
302
4. With the fill neck pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run for at least 30 seconds.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan. Turn the
engine off. By this time, the coolant level
inside the fill neck may be lower. If the level
drops so that coolant is no longer visible in the
horizontal tube section of the fill neck, add
more of the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to
the fill neck until the level is again visible in the
horizontal tube section.
5. Replace the intercooler system pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and
fully seated.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when
the system cools down again, see your dealer.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 284 for more
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature
warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light on page 170 for more information.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Just
turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
303
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An engine coolant temperature warning can
indicate a serious problem. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 170.
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning,
but see or hear no steam, the problem may not
be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
304
If you get the engine coolant temperature warning
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn
it off.
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) for automatic transaxle
or NEUTRAL for manual transaxle, while
stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let
the engine idle.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.4L L4 Engine similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
305
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Intercooler System Pressure Cap
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
306
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere in the cooling
system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.2L or
2.4L L4 engine and there seems to be no leak,
with the engine on, check to see if the electric
engine cooling fan is running. If the engine
is overheating, the fan should be running. If it is
not, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
2.0L L4 Supercharged engine and there
seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, the fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
307
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If
coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at the
COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 296 for more information.
308
2.2L and 2.4L L4 Engines
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank,
add coolant as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about two or two and one-half turns. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow
any pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
309
2. Then keep turning
the pressure cap
slowly, and
remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the COLD FILL line on the tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to
see if the level is below the COLD FILL line. If
the level is below the line, add additional
coolant to bring the level up to the line. Repeat
this procedure until the level remains
constant at the COLD FILL line for at least
five minutes.
310
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch
out for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower
than the COLD FILL line, add more of the
proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until
the level reaches the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank,
you will need to either see your dealer or refer
to the Dealer Service Manual for a special coolant
service fill procedure to ensure enough coolant
is added. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 429.
311
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 284
for reservoir location.
312
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder and, on manual
transaxle vehicles,
the clutch hydraulic
system use the same
reservoir. The reservoir
is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid.
If it is, you should have the brake and/or clutch
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes and/or clutch will not work well,
or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake/clutch
fluid. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
fluid when the brake linings are worn, you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You
should add or remove fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic
system.
{CAUTION:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 284
for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could be
damaged. Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake and/or clutch
hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 167.
313
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 402.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake/
clutch system, the brakes/clutch may not
work well, or they may not even work at all.
This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake/clutch system parts. For example, just
a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake/clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake/clutch system
parts so badly that they will have to be
replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 372.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and may have
rear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
314
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
If your vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not
have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a
rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake
linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for
rotation or changing. When you have the front
brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes
inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, the
disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a
moderate or heavier stop, then the brakes might
not adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,
then — very carefully — make a few moderate
brake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),
so the brakes will adjust properly.
If your vehicle has rear drum brakes and the
brake pedal goes down farther than normal, the
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust
them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes
a few times.
315
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with
top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of the braking system — for example, when the
brake linings wear down and you need new ones
put in — be sure you get new approved GM
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts
in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the
balance between the front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery.
316
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the trunk. You
do not need to access the battery to jump start
your vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 317.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 317 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to
jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not want.
You would not be able to start your vehicle, and
the bad grounding could damage the electrical
systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an
automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual
transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the
parking brake.
317
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could save
the radio!
318
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and
locate the positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on that vehicle.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle
under the hood. It is located in the trunk. You
will not need to access your battery for
jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal.
The remote positive
terminal is located
under a red tethered
cap on the engine
compartment fuse block.
Lift the cap to access
the terminal.
The remote negative (−)
ground terminal, marked
GND (−), is located
behind the engine
coolant surge tank.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 284 for more information on the location
of the positive (+) and negative (−) terminals
on your vehicle.
319
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You
do not need to add water to the battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add
water to take care of that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
320
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It
goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal location
on the vehicle with the dead battery.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
321
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
322
Headlamp Aiming
• The vehicle should be placed so it is
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory
and should need no further adjustment
•
However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident,
the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at
you, this may also mean the vertical aim needs to
be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim
the headlamps as described in the following
procedure.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as
follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the
headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a
perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall.
•
•
•
perpendicular to the wall.
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or
mud on it.
The vehicle should be fully assembled and all
other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
being done.
The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs
(75 kg) on the driver’s seat.
Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s
low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps
will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps
are aimed properly.
The vertical headlamp aiming screws are located
under the hood near the headlamps.
323
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps, do
the following:
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
socket wrench.
324
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 283 for more information.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the
low-beam headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record
the distance.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. Do not place
directly on the headlamp. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being
adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.
4. At the wall measure from the ground
upward (A) to the recorded distance
from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall
the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,
which are under the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm socket wrench.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle
of the beam.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve
beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a
headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the headlamp.
325
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 332.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows
the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
326
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 283 for more information.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker
C. Headlamp
2. Remove the two hex bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the two plastic fasteners from the
fascia.
4. Pull the front fascia back.
You may need someone else to assist you with
Steps 3 and 4.
327
5. Pull the headlamp assembly up on an angle
and towards the radiator to remove it.
6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiring
harness by lifting the plastic locking tab.
7. To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
7.1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the
bulb socket.
7.2. Remove the black retainer by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, front
turn signal, or parking lamp counterclockwise.
For the sidemarker bulb, you will need to
use a tool to assist in turning the bulb socket.
9. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
10. Install a new bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversing
Steps 1 through 8.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly, first
make sure that the wiring harness is in its
original position. If not, the headlamp assembly
will not fit correctly.
You will also need to line up the two tabs on
the bottom of the assembly that fit into
two slots in the headlamp assembly bracket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 for
more information.
2. Locate the CHMSL bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
3. Press the plastic tabs to release the bulb
assembly.
328
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps
(Coupe)
4. Pull the bulb assembly down to access the
bulbs.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with the
assembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulb
assembly back into place until it snaps in. You
may need to use a tool to guide the tabs
into the assembly.
To replace this bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 for
more information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the
trunk trim.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on
the tab to release and pull it straight out.
4. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
329
5. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the
taillamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100
for more information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the
trunk trim. Once you have removed the trim,
there will be one more fastener to remove.
3. Remove the outer two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on
the tab to release and pull it straight out.
5. Remove the taillamp from the quarter panel.
A. Sidemarker
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up
6. Locate the bulb you need to change.
7. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
8. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
9. Install a new bulb.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the
taillamp assembly.
330
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe)
To replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100
for more information.
2. Locate the back-up lamp bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
On vehicles that have a back-up lamp
cover, first remove it by depressing the tab at
the top.
4. Pull out the old bulb.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket by aligning the tabs
and turning it clockwise to secure.
331
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Back-Up Lamps
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
Halogen Headlamps,
High/Low-Beam
License Plate Lamp and
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamps
Bulb Number
921
912
3157KX
9007 LL
194
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the
license plate lamps.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward
you through the opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull
the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
license plate lamp.
332
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 391 for more information on wiper blade
inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 404. Here is how to remove
the wiper blades:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper
assembly toward the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
333
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 253.
CAUTION:
334
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 342.
• Overinflated tires are more likely
to be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 344 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. Your GM warranty
does not cover this type of damage. Keep tires
set to the correct inflation pressure and, when
possible avoid contact with curbs, potholes,
and other road hazards.
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. If you expect to drive on snow
or ice covered roads often, you may want to get
winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance
on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tire tread life.
After switching to winter tires, be alert for changes
in vehicle handling and braking.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 347.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on
all four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as your original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
winter tires with a lower speed rating, never
exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
335
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines. If your vehicle has 205/55R16
size tires, they meet the GM TPC Spec rating, but
the TPC Spec code has not been molded onto the
tire’s sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates
that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
336
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 350.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If
your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 368 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 354.
337
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 342.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
338
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association. A tire size without the letter P as the
first character is certified to European standards.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
339
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 342.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
340
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 253.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 342 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 253.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 346.
341
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 350.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 253.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 253.
342
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 253. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 368.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
343
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause
sudden tire failure. You could have a crash
and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation
pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road
conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in
excellent condition, and set to the
correct cold tire inflation pressure for
the vehicle load.
344
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving
your vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to
35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and rear tires, when
operating your vehicle at high-speed conditions.
When you end high-speed driving, return the tires to
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 253 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 342.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 346
and Wheel Replacement on page 351 for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 391.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
345
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 385.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 355.
346
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were
designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number is followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 336 for additional information.
347
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
winter tires with a lower speed rating, never
exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 368.
348
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information label. This
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 347 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 274 for
additional information.
349
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
350
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
351
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset
and be mounted the same way as the one
it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way, you
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
352
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 355 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P205/55R16, P205/50R17
or 215/45R18 size tires, do not use tire
chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension, or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination, and
road conditions. Follow that
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust, or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other
than P205/55R16, P205/50R17 or 215/45R18 size
tires, use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE Class
S-type chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving
too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on
will damage your vehicle.
353
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
354
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use
the jacking equipment to change a flat tire
safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever
in PARK (P), or shift a manual
transaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION:
(Continued)
355
When you have a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the
trunk.
Base Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 for
more information.
The following information will tell you how to use
the jack and change a tire.
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire
and tools.
356
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Cover
Retainer
Spare Tire
Wing Nut
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down the
spare tire. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 368 for more information.
4. Remove the spare tire (C) by gently pulling it
up and out of the trunk.
5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jack
and remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).
357
Uplevel Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 for
more information.
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire and
tools.
358
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Spare Tire
Foam Support
Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down the
jack, wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).
4. Remove the spare tire by gently pulling it up
and out of the trunk.
You will need to turn the plastic wheel nut
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench from
the jack.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A)
and wheel wrench (B).
359
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Press the button and then pull on the end of the
wheel wrench to extend the handle.
1. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use
the wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel
nut caps.
Once you have loosened the plastic wheel nut
caps with the wheel wrench, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic
nut caps do not come off.
360
2. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry
along the edge of the wheel cover until it
comes off.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
4. It is recommended that you do a safety check
before preceding. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 355 for more information.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in
the correct position or you may damage
your vehicle. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
5. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) behind the front wheel
opening. The rear location is about 4 inches
(10 cm) in front of the rear wheel opening.
361
6. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle’s frame, where the notch is located,
nearest the flat tire.
7. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
362
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for
the compact spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time. The
wheel could come off and cause an
CAUTION:
10. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare
wheel.
(Continued)
363
11. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
12. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 385
for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 385 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
364
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
4-Wheel Nuts
5-Wheel Nuts
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover
in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
365
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Base Model
366
Cover
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Stow Bolt Extension Rod
Spare Tire
Bolt
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Cover
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Stow Bolt Extension Rod
Spare Tire
Foam Support
Bolt
To store a flat or spare tire and tools, do the
following:
1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod and
sleeve from the jack.
2. Screw the stow bolt extension rod and
the sleeve into the existing spare tire
hold-down bolt.
3. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, first
remove the center cap with your hand or
the wheel wrench.
4. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tire
tub. Avoid scraping the aluminum wheel, if the
vehicle has one, on the hold-down bolt.
5. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
Uplevel Model
367
6. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire,
being careful not to scratch the inside of the
wheel.
7. Place the smaller jack hold-down nut (base
models only) in a safe place for use when you
put the compact spare tire back into the trunk.
8. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow bolt
extension rod. Secure the jack and road wheel
using the larger plastic retainer.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as
soon as possible.
Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will
last longer and be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Compact Spare Tire
And do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a
time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made
to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced at your convenience.
368
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt
can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic
surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to
remove particles from your upholstery. It is
important to keep your upholstery from becoming
and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s
interior may experience extremes of heat that could
cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle’s
interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not
intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.
Remove any accidental over-spray from other
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply
cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
369
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
370
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather.
Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings
that are sold to preserve and protect leather may
permanently change the appearance and feel of
your leather and are not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior
because they can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild
soap solution can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on
plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft
plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter
the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
371
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 402.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Washing Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
372
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.
Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 377. Do not use cleaning agents
that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or
abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed
promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or
they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 372.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 377.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes
and polishes that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
373
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when
it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
374
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Tires
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Never
drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
375
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
376
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or
an underbody car washing system can do this
for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
377
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label in the trunk, on the driver
side, near the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if
you ever need to order parts. On this label, you will
find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s
battery, even if your vehicle is not operating.
378
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 80.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should
your headlamps fail to function, have your
headlamp system checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of damage
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, have it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that
has the same amperage. Just pick some feature
of your vehicle that you can get along
without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and
use its fuse if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
There is one additional fuse located in the back of
the vehicle near the battery.
379
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the floor console behind the
forward panel. The panel has three clips. Pull
the panel to disconnect the three clips, and access
the fuses. Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.
380
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Usage
Fuse Puller
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Amplifier
Cluster
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
Fuses
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Usage
Stoplamp
Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning, PASS-Key® III+
Empty
Spare
Airbag
Spare
Windshield Wiper
Climate Control System, Ignition
Empty
Empty
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
Sunroof
Spare
Fuses
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Relays
30
31
32
Usage
Empty
Audio System
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
(Airbag)
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
Control Module
Door Locks
Interior Lights
Steering Wheel Control Illumination
Power Windows
Usage
Climate Control System
Empty
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
381
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Lift off the cover to
check the fuses. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 284 for more information on location.
382
Fuses
SPARES
Blank
Blank
REAR DEFOG
COOL FAN2
CRNK
COOL FAN 1
BCM3
BCM2
FOG LAMP
HORN
RT HI BEAM
LT HI BEAM
RT LO BEAM
LT LO BEAM
DRL
FUEL PUMP
EXH
Blank
Usage
Spares
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Defogger
Engine Cooling Fan High Speed
Starter
Engine Cooling Fan Low Speed
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 2
Fog Lamps
Horn
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Driver’s Side High Beam
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
Driver’s Side Low Beam
Daytime Running Lamps
Fuel Pump
Exhaust Emissions
Not Used
Fuses
INJ
Blank
ABS
Usage
Injectors
Not Used
Anti-lock Brake System
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
PCM/ECM
Control Module
EPS
Electric Power Steering
AIR PUMP
AIR Pump
PRK LAMP
Park Lamps
WPR
Windshield Wiper
IP IGN
Ignition
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
AIR SOL/
AIR Solenoid (L61, LE5),
AFTERCOOL
Aftercooler (L4)
ABS2
Anti-lock Brake System 2
PRK/NEUT
Park, Neutral
ECM/TRANS
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
BCK UP
Back-Up Lamps
TRUNK/OUTLET Trunk, Accessory Power Outlet
Blank
Not Used
383
Fuses
Blank
S
BAND/ONSTAR
ABS3
LTR
MIR
HTD SEATS
CNSTR VENT
Relays
REAR DEFOG
COOL FAN2
WPR HI/LO
CRNK
384
Usage
Not Used
Audio, OnStar®
Anti-lock Brake System 3
Cigarette Lighter
Mirrors
Heated Seats
Canister Vent
Usage
Rear Defogger
Engine Cooling Fan 2
Windshield Wiper High/Low Speed
Starter
Relays
COOL FAN1
FUEL PUMP
WPR ON/OFF
COOL FANS
PWR/TRN
AIR PUMP
A/C CLTCH
AIR SOL/
AFTERCOOL
RUN/CRNK
Misc.
PLR
Usage
Engine Cooling Fan 1
Fuel Pump
Windshield Wiper On/Off
Engine Cooling Fans
Powertrain
AIR Pump
Air Conditioning Clutch
AIR Solenoid (L61, LE5),
Aftercooler (L4)
Run, Crank
Usage
Fuse Puller
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 402 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
2.2L L4 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
Intercooler System 2.0L Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
Fuel Tank
2.2L L4 Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,
VT, NY, NH, MA (see your dealer for bordering states)
2.2L L4 Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in all other
states (see your dealer for more information)
2.4L and 2.0L Supercharged L4 Engine sold new in all states.
Transaxle, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
9.2 qt
7.4 qt
7.4 qt
2.1 qt
8.7 L
7.0 L
7.0L
1.95 L
5.0 qt
6.0 qt
4.7 L
5.7 L
13.5 gal
51.1 L
13.0 gal
49.2 L
13.0 gal
7.0 qt
49.2 L
6.6 L
385
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Transaxle, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines
1.7 qt
1.6 L
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
1.7 qt
1.6 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
386
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.2L L4
F
Automatic
Manual
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
2.0L L4 (Supercharged)
P
Manual
0.039 inches (1.00 mm)
2.4L L4
B
Manual
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 388
Introduction ............................................... 388
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 388
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 389
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 389
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 391
Additional Required Services ..................... 394
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 395
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 397
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 398
At Least Once a Month ............................. 398
At Least Once a Year ............................... 399
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 402
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 404
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 405
Maintenance Record .................................. 406
387
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
388
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you
have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in
good condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
389
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 277.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 391 should be performed when indicated.
See Additional Required Services on page 394 and
Maintenance Footnotes on page 395 for further
information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some
jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your
own maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools
and equipment for the job. If you have any
doubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to
have a qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
390
If you want to purchase service information, see
Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 429.
Owner Checks and Services on page 397 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 402 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 404.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 180.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®
dealer has GM-trained service technicians who will
perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system.
391
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 292 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
392
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the
CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 287. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 292. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 294. See footnote (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 345 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 398.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. If you have the
2.0L L4 supercharged engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
•
393
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 294.
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
394
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
2.0L Supercharged Engine: Intercooler
system service (or every five years,
whichever occurs first).
See footnote (n).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect drum brake
linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect other
brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,
calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering
cables for proper hook-up, binding, cracks,
chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
395
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges
and latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid
hinges and latches. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Check system for interference or binding
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that
have high effort or excessive wear. Do not
lubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.
396
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require
changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 296 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if
needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
(n) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This
service can be complex; you should have your
dealer perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 296 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
pressure cap and filler neck. Pressure test
the system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability, and emission
control performance of your vehicle. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with
these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 402.
397
At Each Fuel Fill
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 287 for
further details.
At Least Once a Month
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure
to keep your engine oil at the proper level
can cause damage to your engine not covered
by your warranty.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
Do not forget to check the spare tire. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 342. Check to
make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 355.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 296 for further details.
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(2.0L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 296 for further details.
398
Tire Inflation Check
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 345.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start
the engine in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the
shift lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start the engine.
The vehicle should start only when the clutch
pedal is pushed down all the way to the
floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal
is not pushed all the way down, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 120.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it
starts.
399
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 120.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
400
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition
should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P). The ignition key should
come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transaxle, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
401
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
402
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
Oil on page 287.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils
meeting this standard may be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
Engine Oil
for Gasoline Engines starburst
(2.0L L4
symbol. However, not all synthetic
Supercharged API oils with the starburst symbol
engine)
will meet this GM standard. You
should look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. For
the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 287.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
System
page 296.
Intercooler
System
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
(2.0L L4
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Supercharged Coolant.
engine)
Usage
Hydraulic Brake
System
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Windshield
Washer
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Manual
Transaxle
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
Manual
Transaxle
(2.0L L4
Supercharged
engine)
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluid/Lubricant
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
Manual Transmission Fluid
(Part No. 21018899).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
Manual
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Transaxle Shift in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Linkage
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Chassis
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Assembly,
Secondary
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
403
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
21999324
A2956C
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
15239447
A2975C
12605566
PF457G
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engine
12598004
41-103
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
12787099
PFR6T-10G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
52493319
CF125
Driver’s Side — 22 inches (56 cm)
15243233
—
Passenger’s Side — 17 inches (43 cm)
15243232
—
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
404
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines
Belt routing for air conditioning option shown.
Dotted line shows routing for vehicles without air
conditioning option.
405
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 388.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 397 can be added on the following
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
406
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
407
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
408
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 410
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 410
Online Owner Center ................................. 413
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ........................................... 414
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 414
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 415
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 416
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 419
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .............................................. 422
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 423
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 428
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................ 428
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ........................................... 428
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 428
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 429
409
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If
your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present
mileage (kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
410
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the BBB
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
using the toll-free telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General
Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
this program.
411
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in about
70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
412
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
413
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at
its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by
dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the
toll-free number for assistance. However, if a
customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the
letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
414
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
415
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872)
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
416
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres in Canada).
Service to provide diesel may be restricted. For
safety reasons, propane and other alternative
fuels will not be provided through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration
and personal ID before lock-out service is
provided. Lock-out service will be covered at no
charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
vehicle. If your vehicle will not start, Roadside
Assistance will arrange to have your vehicle
towed to the nearest authorized dealership.
In the U.S., replacement keys made at the
customer’s expense will be covered within
10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare
tire, installation of the tire in good condition will
be covered at no charge. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered at
no charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
but it is best to allow three weeks before your
planned departure date. Trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.
417
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense you
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
418
• Alternative Service: There may be times,
when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance, your advisor may authorize
you to secure local emergency road service,
and you will be reimbursed up to $100 upon
submission of the original receipt to Roadside
Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are
covered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are
the responsibility of the driver.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away. U.S. customers call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers
call 1-800-268-6800.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,
the claims become excessive in frequency or type
of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
419
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
Transportation Options
Scheduling Service Appointments
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a service appointment
and advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
420
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used as ‘shuttle
service,’ the reimbursement is limited to the
associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and
may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may
not be available at every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms
and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
421
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems
that monitor and control several aspects of the
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board
vehicle computers to monitor emission control
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor
conditions for airbag deployment and, if the
vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS),
to provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver
control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected
malfunctions; other information is stored only in a
crash event by computer systems, such as those
commonly called Event Data Recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision.
422
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not
record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data
collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
423
Recycled original equipment parts may also
be used for repair. These parts are typically
removed from vehicles that were total losses in
prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being
recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is
not known. Such parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related
failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM
and may not have been tested for your vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit
premature durability/corrosion problems, and may
not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.
424
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to
recommend a collision repair center that has
GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 416 for more
information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in
your vehicle.
425
• Gather the important information you will
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
need from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
426
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair
facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it
towed there. Specify to the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be original equipment
parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will
not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine
GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you
may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
427
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
428
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify General Motors. Please call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General Motors
dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483). This reference number is
needed to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
429
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for
all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +
Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +
Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
430
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 274
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 152
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 81
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 278
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 378
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 294
Air Conditioning ........................................... 154
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 164
Readiness Light ....................................... 163
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) .......................................... 422
Airbag System ............................................... 66
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 81
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 73
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 75
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 80
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 74
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 71
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 69
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 219
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ....................................................
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .......
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........
Care of Safety Belts ................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...........................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ..............
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ..........
Fabric/Carpet ...........................................
Finish Care ..............................................
Finish Damage .........................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................
Leather ....................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...............................
Tires ........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...........................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................
Ashtray(s) ....................................................
Audio System(s) ..........................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................
Care of Your CD Player ...........................
219
227
168
374
372
376
373
369
370
373
376
371
371
375
375
376
377
372
372
374
153
188
217
219
431
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Care of Your CDs .................................... 219
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 219
Radio with CD ................................ 192, 197
Setting the Time .............................. 189, 190
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 217
Understanding Radio Reception ............... 218
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 219
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 98
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................ 295
Operation ................................................. 115
B
Battery ........................................................
Electric Power Management .....................
Run-Down Protection ...............................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
Boost Gage .................................................
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................
Emergencies ............................................
Parking ....................................................
System Warning Light ..............................
Brakes ........................................................
Braking .......................................................
432
316
151
152
244
176
227
229
120
167
313
226
Braking in Emergencies ...............................
Break-In, New Vehicle .................................
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Back-Up Lamps .......................................
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) ..............................................
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
Headlamp Aiming .....................................
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ...........
License Plate Lamps ................................
Replacement Bulbs ..................................
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps .............
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .....................................
Buying New Tires ........................................
229
108
326
331
328
326
323
327
332
332
329
330
347
C
California Fuel ............................................. 278
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 275
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 385
Carbon Monoxide .............. 100, 125, 248, 261
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 372
Your CD Player ........................................ 219
Care of (cont.)
Your CDs ................................................. 219
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 207
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 133
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 328
Chains, Tire ................................................. 353
Charging System Light ................................ 166
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 170
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 282
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 376
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 47
Infants and Young Children ........................ 43
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 53
Older Children ........................................... 40
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position .......................................... 59
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................. 62
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 51
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 153
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 374
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 373
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 370
Finish Care .............................................. 373
Cleaning (cont.)
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 369
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 371
Leather .................................................... 371
Tires ........................................................ 375
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 376
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 372
Weatherstrips ........................................... 372
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 374
Climate Control System ............................... 154
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 158
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 157
Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 296
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 423
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 36
Compact Spare Tire .................................... 368
Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ........... 237
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 104
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 226
Convenience Net ......................................... 134
Coolant
Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 170
Heater, Engine ......................................... 113
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 303
Cooling System ........................................... 305
Cruise Control ............................................. 145
433
Cupholder(s) ................................................
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ...........................
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .........................
Customer Assistance Offices ....................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..............
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ......
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors ..................................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
133
419
414
414
410
415
428
428
428
416
429
D
Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 149
Defensive Driving ........................................ 222
Delayed Locking ............................................ 97
Differential, Limited-Slip ............................... 231
Disc, MP3 ................................................... 207
Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 275
Dome Lamp ................................................ 151
434
Door
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 98
Delayed Locking ........................................ 97
Locks ......................................................... 96
Power Door Locks ..................................... 97
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 98
Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 98
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 24
Seat Height Adjuster .................................. 10
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 177
DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 178
DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 182
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 180
Driver’s Storage Compartment ..................... 133
Driving
At Night ................................................... 238
City .......................................................... 242
Defensive ................................................. 222
Drunken ................................................... 223
Freeway ................................................... 243
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 246
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 239
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 253
Winter ...................................................... 248
E
Easy Entry Seat ............................................ 15
Electric Power Management ........................ 151
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ................................... 378
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 382
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 380
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 379
Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 379
Power Windows and Other Power
Options ................................................. 379
Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 379
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 294
Battery ..................................................... 316
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 170
Coolant .................................................... 296
Coolant Heater ......................................... 113
Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 170
Drive Belt Routing .................................... 405
Engine Compartment Overview ................ 284
Exhaust ................................................... 125
Oil ........................................................... 287
Oil Life System ........................................ 292
Engine (cont.)
Overheating ............................................. 303
Starting .................................................... 111
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 230
Warning Light ........................................... 169
Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 151
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 422
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 39
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................
Flat Tire, Storing .........................................
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle .................................
Manual Transaxle .....................................
Windshield Washer ..................................
294
376
219
140
143
354
355
365
295
295
312
435
Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 175
Fog Lamps .................................................. 150
Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 16
Fuel ............................................................ 276
Additives .................................................. 278
California Fuel .......................................... 278
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 282
Filling Your Tank ...................................... 280
Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 279
Gage ....................................................... 175
Gasoline Octane ...................................... 277
Gasoline Specifications ............................ 277
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 382
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 380
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 379
Windshield Wiper ..................................... 379
G
Gage
Boost .......................................................
Fuel .........................................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
436
176
175
162
162
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
277
277
133
415
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 140
Head Restraints ............................................ 14
Headlamp
Aiming ..................................................... 323
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 379
Headlamps .................................................. 148
Bulb Replacement .................................... 326
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 149
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 143
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 326
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 327
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 142
On Reminder ........................................... 149
Wiper Activated ........................................ 149
Heated Seats ................................................ 11
Heater ......................................................... 154
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .......................... 10
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 175
High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 344
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 245
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 246
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 282
Release ................................................... 283
Horn ............................................................ 140
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23
Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 296
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 108
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 43
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 342
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 138
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 150
Cluster ..................................................... 161
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 317
K
Keyless Entry System ................................... 88
Keys ............................................................. 87
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 336
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 152
Dome ....................................................... 151
Electric Power Management ..................... 151
Fog .......................................................... 150
Mirror Reading ......................................... 151
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 53
License Plate Lamps ................................... 332
437
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 163
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 168
Brake System Warning ............................. 167
Charging System ..................................... 166
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 170
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light ....................................... 169
Fog Lamp ................................................ 175
Highbeam On .......................................... 175
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 170
Oil Pressure ............................................. 174
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 164
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 163
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 162
Security ................................................... 175
Up-Shift ................................................... 167
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................. 151
Limited-Slip Differential ................................ 231
Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 253
Lockout Protection ......................................... 99
Locks
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 98
Delayed Locking ........................................ 97
Door .......................................................... 96
Lockout Protection ..................................... 99
438
Locks (cont.)
Power Door ............................................... 97
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 98
Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 98
Loss of Control ........................................... 236
Lumbar
Manual Controls ......................................... 10
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services .................... 394
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 398
At Least Once a Month ............................ 398
At Least Once a Year .............................. 399
Introduction .............................................. 388
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 395
Maintenance Record ................................ 406
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 388
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 404
Owner Checks and Services .................... 397
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 402
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 391
Using ....................................................... 389
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 389
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 170
Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10
Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Manual Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................ 295
Operation ................................................. 118
Manual Windows ......................................... 103
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 180
Mirror Reading Lamps ................................. 151
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 127
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 127
Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 128
Outside Manual Mirror .............................. 127
Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 128
Outside Remote Control Mirror ................. 127
MP3 ............................................................ 207
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 413
Oil
Engine ..................................................... 287
Pressure Light .......................................... 174
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 292
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 40
Online Owner Center ................................... 413
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 129
Other Warning Devices ................................ 140
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 157
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 152
Outside
Convex Mirror .......................................... 128
Manual Mirror .......................................... 127
Power Mirrors .......................................... 128
Remote Control Mirror .............................. 127
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 397
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
N
P
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 108
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 404
O
Odometer .................................................... 162
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 234
Paint, Damage ............................................
Park (P)
Shifting Into .............................................
Shifting Out of .........................................
Parking
Brake .......................................................
Over Things That Burn ............................
376
121
123
120
124
439
Parking (cont.)
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 164
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 158
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 75
Passing ....................................................... 234
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 106
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 106
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 152
Door Locks ................................................ 97
Electrical System ..................................... 379
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 111
Windows .................................................. 103
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 39
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........... 98
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 22
R
Racing
Radios
Care
Care
440
or Other Competitive Driving ............
........................................................
of Your CD Player ...........................
of Your CDs ....................................
237
188
219
219
Radios (cont.)
Radio with CD ................................ 192, 197
Setting the Time .............................. 189, 190
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 217
Understanding Reception ......................... 218
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 98
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 36
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 33
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 127
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 127
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 402
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 259
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 88
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................... 89
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................ 360
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 356
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 332
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 428
General Motors ........................................ 428
United States Government ....................... 428
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 82
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 83
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 111
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety
Belts .......................................................... 32
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 416
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 253
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 405
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 126
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 163
Pretensioners ............................................. 39
Reminder Light ........................................ 162
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 372
Driver Position ........................................... 24
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts ....................................................... 22
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 36
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 33
Safety Belts (cont.)
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 39
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 391
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................ 10
Easy Entry Seat ........................................ 15
Head Restraints ......................................... 14
Heated Seats ............................................. 11
Manual ........................................................ 9
Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12
Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 16
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ..................................... 59
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 62
Security Light .............................................. 175
Service ........................................................ 274
Accessories and Modifications .................. 274
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ......................................... 276
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 275
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 275
441
Service (cont.)
Engine Soon Light ................................... 170
Publications Ordering Information ............. 429
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 80
Setting the Time ................................. 189, 190
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 375
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 121
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 123
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 142
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................. 368
Installing .................................................. 360
Removing ................................................ 356
Storing ..................................................... 365
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 385
Speedometer ............................................... 162
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 16
Starting Your Engine ................................... 111
Steering ...................................................... 231
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 217
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 140
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ................... 133
Convenience Net ..................................... 134
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 133
442
Storage Areas (cont.)
Driver’s Storage Compartment .................
Glove Box ................................................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...............
Sun Visors ..................................................
Sunroof .......................................................
133
133
252
104
134
T
Tachometer .................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up
Lamps ..................................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................
Tilt Wheel ....................................................
Tires ...........................................................
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ...............................................
Buying New Tires .....................................
Chains .....................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ................................
162
329
330
217
104
104
106
106
140
334
374
347
353
355
Tires (cont.)
Cleaning ..................................................
Compact Spare Tire .................................
Different Size ...........................................
High-Speed Operation ..............................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Installing the Spare Tire ...........................
Removing the Flat Tire .............................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .........
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .....
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Winter Tires .............................................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
375
368
349
344
354
342
345
360
360
356
365
336
339
350
351
351
346
335
259
261
258
Traction
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................
Limited-Slip Differential .............................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Fluid, Manual ...........................................
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ...................
Transaxle Operation, Manual .......................
Transmission
Up-Shift Light ...........................................
Trunk ..........................................................
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
230
169
231
295
295
115
118
167
100
142
141
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 218
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 350
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 167
443
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 226
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 253
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................ 422
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 378
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 378
Vehicle Personalization
DIC .......................................................... 182
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 157
Visors .......................................................... 104
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 160
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 180
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 140
Other Warning Devices ............................ 140
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 351
Different Size ........................................... 349
Replacement ............................................ 351
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 51
Windows ..................................................... 102
Manual ..................................................... 103
Power ...................................................... 103
Windshield
Washer .................................................... 144
Washer Fluid ........................................... 312
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 333
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 374
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 379
Wipers ..................................................... 143
Winter Driving ............................................. 248
Winter Tires ................................................. 335
Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 149
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 215
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 219
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 389
444

advertisement

Download PDF

advertisement